Yamaha Portatone PSR-E313 Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: Portatone PSR-E313

Categoría: Sintetizador

Tipo: Manual de usuario

Este manual también es adecuado para

Owner’s Manual

2 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply

(adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power sup-

ply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on

the name plate, or speciﬁcally recommended by Yamaha.

This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by

Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety

markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO

CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the speciﬁcations with-

out notice or obligation to update existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an ampli-

ﬁer and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro-

ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing

loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high

volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you

experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you

should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time

period before damage occurs.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relat-

ing to how a function or effect works (when the unit is

operating as designed) are not covered by the manufac-

turer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibil-

ity. Please study this manual carefully and consult your

dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user

safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe

that our products and the production methods used to pro-

duce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the let-

ter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the

following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable bat-

tery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average

life span of this type of battery is approximately ﬁve years.

When replacement becomes necessary, contact a quali-

ﬁed service representative to perform the replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries.

Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the

battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the

charger is intended for the battery being charged.

When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or

with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be

installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation

may result in overheating and battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery.

Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used

batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your

area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type bat-

teries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or

for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an

end, please observe all local, state, and federal regula-

tions that relate to the disposal of products that contain

lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to

assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product.

The model number, serial number, power requirements,

etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model

number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the

spaces provided below and retain this manual as a perma-

nent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

92-BP (bottom)

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 3

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY

THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-

tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require-

ments. Modiﬁcations not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC,

to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high qual-

ity shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail-

ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori-

zation to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to

comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regula-

tions, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance

with these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices. This equipment generates/

uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used

according to the instructions found in the users man-

ual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of

other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-

tions does not guarantee that interference will not

occur in all installations. If this product is found to be

the source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate

the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reori-

ent the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm rib-

bon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-

tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized

to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate

the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo-

ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands)

Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder

Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sam-

melstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren

Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.

(class B)

(battery)

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar

ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge

netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or

slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta

verkosta.

(standby)

4 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injur y or even death from

electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to,

the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by

Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the

instrument or overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may

have accumulated on it.

• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or

radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place

heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip

over, or roll anything over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If

it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have

it inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a

sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells

or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power

switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injur y to you or others, or

damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always

hold the plug itself and not the cord.

• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during

electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-

connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause

overheating in the outlet.

• Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity

markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, ﬁre, or battery ﬂuid

leakage.

• Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries

together with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline

batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or

different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause

overheating, ﬁre, or battery ﬂuid leakage.

• Do not dispose of batteries in ﬁre.

• Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.

• When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long

time, remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of

the battery ﬂuid.

• Keep batteries away from children.

• If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked ﬂuid. If the battery ﬂuid

should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately

with water and consult a doctor. Battery ﬂuid is corrosive and may possibly

cause loss of sight or chemical burns.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold

or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or

radio may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might

accidentally fall over.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Battery

Location

(4)-11 1/2

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 5

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other

cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is

easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off

the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the

power switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the

minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make

sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand speciﬁed for the instrument. When attaching the stand or

rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to

the internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the

volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the

volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening

level.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint

thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

• Do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the

panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and

unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this

might discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do

not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at

a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent

hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears,

consult a physician.

Saving and backing up your data

• Some data items (page 31) are automatically saved as backup data in the

internal memory even if you turn the power off.

Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save

important data to external device such as a computer.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

When using a power adaptor, even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are

not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.

● COPYRIGHT NOTICE

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect

to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer soft-

ware, style ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and

contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences.

DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly pro-

hibited except for your personal use.

● Trademarks

•Windows is the registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation.

• The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective com-

panies.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Saving data

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from

those on your instrument.

(4)-11 2/2

6 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Congratulations and thank you for purchasing

the Yamaha PSR-E313/YPT-310 PORTATONE!

Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument

in order to take full advantage of its various features.

Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you ﬁnish reading,

and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function.

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compat-

ible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of

manufacturer. The GM mark is afﬁxed to all software and hardware products that support GM

System Level.

XGlite

As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simpliﬁed version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone gener-

ation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator.

However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original

data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects.

Stereo Sampled Piano

The instrument has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice—created by state-of-the-art stereo

sampling technology and using Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone

generation system.

Yamaha Education Suite 5

The instrument features the new Yamaha Education Suite—a set of learning tools that utilize

the latest technology to make studying and practicing music more fun and fulﬁlling than ever

before!

Touch Response

The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch,

gives you maximum expressive level control over the voices.

Style File

The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single

uniﬁed format.

The PSR-E313/YPT-310 package includes the

following items. Please check that you have them

all.

• Music rest

• Owner’s manual (this book)

Formats and functions

Supplied Accessories

● Music rest

Insert the music

rest into the slots

as shown.

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 7

Formats and functions ...............................................6

Supplied Accessories.................................................6

Setting Up 8

Power Requirements .................................................8

Connecting headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) .9

Connecting a footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) .................9

Using the MIDI Terminals ..........................................9

Turn on the power...................................................... 9

Panel Controls and Terminals 10

Front Panel ..............................................................10

Rear Panel ...............................................................10

— Quick Guide —

Step 1

Changing the Voices 12

Try playing a variety of instrument Voices ...............12

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual .............13

Playing Different Voices with the Left and

Right Hands—Split ...............................................14

Playing the Grand Piano Voice ................................15

Drum kits.................................................................. 15

Step 2

Fun Sounds 17

Step 3

Playing Songs 18

Select and Listen to a Specific Song .......................18

Step 4

Play with a Style 20

Selecting a rhythm of a Style ...................................20

Playing with a Style.................................................. 21

Step 5

Play Using the Music Database 23

Step 6

Play With The Metronome 24

Start the metronome ................................................24

Step 7

Record your own performance 27

Recording Your Performance ..................................27

Recording to a specified track..................................28

Deleting User Songs ................................................30

Backup and Initialization 31

Backup .....................................................................31

Initialization ..............................................................31

Basic Operation and Displays 32

Basic Operation .......................................................32

Display .....................................................................34

Song Lesson 35

Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn)........................................ 35

Lesson 2 (Timing) ....................................................37

Lesson 3 (Waiting) ...................................................38

Song settings 39

Changing the Melody Voice .................................... 39

Song Volume........................................................... 39

Mute ........................................................................ 40

Practice Makes Perfect ........................................... 41

Play With a Variety of Effects 42

Adding Harmony...................................................... 42

Adding Reverb......................................................... 43

Adding Chorus......................................................... 44

Adding Panel Sustain .............................................. 44

Handy Performance Features 45

Touch Response Sensitivity .................................... 45

Setting the Split Point .............................................. 46

Transpose ............................................................... 46

Tuning ..................................................................... 47

One Touch Setting .................................................. 47

Changing the tempo of the Song/Style.................... 48

Adjusting the Voice Parameters .............................. 48

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions 49

Various ways to start and stop Style playback ........ 49

Pattern Variation (Sections) .................................... 51

Adjusting the Style Volume ..................................... 53

Registering Style Files............................................. 54

Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords 55

Easy Chords............................................................ 55

Standard Chords ..................................................... 55

Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ...... 57

Function Settings 59

Select the item and change the value ..................... 59

About MIDI 61

What is MIDI?.......................................................... 61

What You Can Do With MIDI................................... 61

Transferring Performance Data To and

From Another Instrument..................................... 62

Transferring data between

the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and a computer............. 65

Troubleshooting ...........................................................69

Voice List.......................................................................70

Maximum Polyphony ............................................... 70

Drum Kit List .................................................................76

Style List .......................................................................79

Music Database List .....................................................80

Effect Type List .............................................................81

MIDI Implementation Chart ..........................................82

MIDI Data Format ..........................................................84

Effect map ............................................................... 84

Specifications ...............................................................85

Index ..............................................................................86

Contents

8 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power.

Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an

AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not

deplete resources.

■ Using an AC Power Adaptor

q Make sure that the power of the instrument is off

(the backlit display is off).

w Connect the AC power adaptor to the power supply

jack.

e Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.

■ Using Batteries

q Open the battery compartment cover located on the

instrument’s bottom panel.

w Insert the six new alkaline batteries, being careful

to follow the polarity markings on the side of the

compartment.

e Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it

locks ﬁrmly in place.

For battery operation the instrument requires six

1.5V “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries. (Alka-

line batteries are recommended.) When battery

power becomes too low for proper operation, the

volume may be reduced, the sound may be dis-

torted, and other problems may occur. When this

happens, make sure to replace all batteries, follow-

ing the precautions listed below.

If necessary, also make sure to save all important

User data (see page 31), since custom panel set-

tings are lost when the batteries are removed.

Power Requirements

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor (PA-130 or an equivalent

recommended by Yamaha) only. The use of other

adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the

adaptor and the instrument.

WARNING

• Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the

instrument, or during electrical storms.

CAUTION

AC power

adaptor

AC outlet

•Never connect or disconnect the AC power adaptor when

the batteries are installed in the instrument and the power

is on. Doing so will turn the power off, possibly resulting

in loss of the data being transferred and the data cur-

rently in the transfer destination during transferring or

recording a data.

CAUTION

• Use alkaline batteries for this instrument. Other types of

batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may have

sudden drops of power when battery power becomes low,

possibly resulting in loss of data in the ﬂash memory.

• Make sure to install the batteries with the proper orienta-

tion, maintaining the correct polarity (as shown). Incor-

rect battery installation may result in heat, ﬁre and/or

leaking of corrosive chemicals.

• When the batteries run down, replace them with a com-

plete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new

batteries. Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g.

alkaline and manganese) at the same time.

• If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time,

remove the batteries from it, in order to prevent possible

ﬂuid leakage from the battery.

• Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to

ﬂash memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types)

can be drained rapidly by this type of operation. If the bat-

teries do become drained during a data transfer, both the

data being transferred and the data currently in the trans-

fer destination will be lost.

CAUTION

Setting Up

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 9

Make all necessary connections BEFORE turning the power on.

The PSR-E313/YPT-310 speakers are automatically

shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The

PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an external

output.

You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a

keyboard ampliﬁer, stereo system, mixer, tape

recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the

instrument’s output signal to that device.

The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain

as you play by pressing an optional footswitch. Plug

the Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and

use it to switch sustain on and off.

The instrument also features MIDI terminals, allow-

ing you to interface the instrument with other MIDI

instruments or computers. (For more information, see

page 61.)

Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER

VOLUME] control to the left and press the

[STANDBY/ON] switch to turn on the power. Press-

ing the switch again turns the power off.

Backup data in the ﬂash memory (page 31) is loaded

to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no

backup data exists on ﬂash memory, all instrument

settings are restored to the initial factory defaults

when the power is turned on.

Connecting headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)

Connecting a footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)

•Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for

long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear

fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing.

WARNING

•To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the

external devices at the minimum setting and turn power

off the devices before connecting them. Failure to

observe these precautions may result in electric shock or

equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all

devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the

volume controls while playing the instrument to set the

desired listening level.

CAUTION

• Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to

the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power.

• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing

this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, result-

ing in reversed footswitch operation.

NOTE

Using the MIDI Terminals

Turn on the power

MIDI instrument

• MIDI cables (sold separately) must be used for connecting to

MIDI devices. They can be bought at music stores, etc.

NOTE

• When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off,

a small amount of electricity is still being consumed by

the instrument. When you are not using the instrument for

a long time, make sure to unplug the AC power adaptor

from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from

the instrument.

CAUTION

•Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing!”

message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage

the ﬂash memory and result in a loss of data.

CAUTION

10 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

■ Front Panel

q [STANDBY/ON] switch ....................................page 9, 32

w [MASTER VOLUME] control ......................... pages 9, 32

e LESSON PART

[L] button .............................................................page 36

[R] button.............................................................page 36

e [REC TRACK 2] button........................................ page 29

[REC TRACK 1] button........................................ page 29

r [LISTEN & LEARN] button..................................page 36

t [TIMING] button...................................................page 37

y [WAITING] button ................................................page 38

u [FUNCTION] button..................................... pages 59, 33

i [SONG] button............................................. pages 18, 33

o [STYLE] button............................................ pages 20, 33

!0 [VOICE] button ............................................ pages 12, 33

!1 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+/YES], [-/NO] ............page 33

!2 [DEMO] button.....................................................page 19

!3 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button .........................page 24

!4 [A-B REPEAT] button..........................................page 41

!5 [REW] button .......................................................page 19

!6 [FF] button ...........................................................page 19

!9 [PAUSE] button....................................................page 19

!4 [ACMP ON/OFF] button ......................................page 21

!5 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button................................page 51

!6 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button...................................page 51

!9 [SYNC START] button.........................................page 21

!7 [TEMPO/TAP] button...........................................page 48

!8 [REC] button........................................................page 27

@0 [START/STOP] button .........................................page 32

@1 [PORTABLE GRAND] button..............................page 15

@2 [MUSIC DATABASE] button................................page 23

@3 [REVERB ON/OFF] button..................................page 43

@4 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button.......................................page 14

@5 [DUAL ON/OFF] button .......................................page 13

@6 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button ..............................page 42

@7 [TOUCH ON/OFF] button ....................................page 45

@8 Drum Kit...............................................................page 16

■ Rear Panel

@9 MIDI IN/OUT terminals ........................................page 61

#0 SUSTAIN jack.........................................................page 9

#1 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ......................................... page 9

#2 DC IN 12V jack.......................................................page 8

When the lesson mode

When the recording mode

When the Song mode

When the Style mode

!5 !7

Song List (page 19)

Style List (page 76)

■ Front Panel

Panel Controls and Terminals

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 11

GrandPno

001

GrandPno

001

@6 @7

@0 @4

Voice List (page 70)

Display (page 34)

Music Database List (page 80)

#2#1#0@9

■ Rear Panel

12 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

— Quick Guide —

Step

Changing the Voices

In addition to the piano Voice, a wide variety of other instrument Voices can be selected and

played, including guitar, trumpet and ﬂute. The Voice selected here becomes the Main Voice.

Press the [VOICE] button.

The Voice number and name are displayed.

Select a Voice.

Select the desired Voice by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+],

[-].

Refer to the Voice List on page 70.

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing different Voices.

Try playing a variety of instrument Voices

GrandPno

001

Voice number Voice name

Appears when the

Voice mode.

Flute

084

The Voice shown here

becomes the Main Voice

for the instrument.

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 13

Quick Guide

You can select a second Voice which will play in addition to the Main Voice selected on the previ-

ous page. This second Voice is known as the Dual Voice.

Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button to turn the Dual function on.

When Dual is on, you can play a Dual Voice in a layer with the

Main Voice.

To turn the Dual Voice off and play only the Main Voice, press the

[DUAL ON/OFF] button again.

The best-suited Dual Voice is automatically selected whenever you

turn Dual on, but you can select any of the available Dual Voices.

Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than a second.

“D. Voice” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the Dual

Voice will appear.

Select a Dual Voice.

Select the desired Dual Voice by using the number buttons [0]–

[9], [+], [-].

Refer to the Voice List on page 70.

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual

Play the Dual Voice

Selecting a Dual Voice

Two Voices sound at the

same time

Flute

084

001

Appears when Dual

is on.

•You can also access the

Dual Voice setting display

by pressing the [FUNC-

TION] button several times,

then selecting Dual Voice.

NOTE

Marimba

102

001

Hold for longer

than a second.

Currently selected Dual Voice

Step 1 Changing the Voices

14 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

In the Split mode you can play different Voices to the left and right of the keyboard “Split Point.”

The main and Dual Voices can be played to the right of the Split Point, while the Voice played to

the left of the Split Point is known as the “Split Voice”

Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button to turn the Split function on.

When Split is on you can play a Split Voice to the left of the Split

Point.

When you don’t want to play a Split Voice, press the [SPLIT ON/

OFF] button to turn Split off.

You can select a different Split Voice by following the procedure out-

lined below.

Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than a second.

“S. Voice” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the Split

Voice will appear.

Select a Split Voice

Select the desired Split Voice by using the number buttons [0]–

[9], [+], [-].

Refer to the Voice List on page 70.

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split

Play the Split Voice

Select a Split Voice

Main Voice and Dual

Voice

Split Voice

Split Point

Choir

059

001

Appears when Split

is on.

• The Split Point setting can

be changed as required

(page 46).

NOTE

•You can also access the

Split Voice setting display

by pressing the [FUNC-

TION] button several times,

then selecting the Split

Voice.

NOTE

FngrBass

039

001

Hold for longer

than a second.

The currently selected

Split Voice

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 15

Quick Guide

When you simply want to play a piano Voice, all you have to do is press one convenient button.

Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.

The Voice “Grand Piano 001” will automatically be selected as

the Main Voice.

Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion

instruments.

When drum kits (Voice number 109–121) are

selected, you can play different percussion sounds

directly from the keyboard.

Press the [VOICE] button.

Select the desired Drum kit.

Select one of the Voice numbers from 109–121 by using the num-

ber buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

Playing the Grand Piano Voice

Drum kits

Std.Kit1

109

Example: 109 Standard Kit 1

Step 1 Changing the Voices

16 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

● Drum Kit List

Try out each key.

You’ll hear bongo drums, congas, maracas, and more—a compre-

hensive variety of drum and percussion sounds.

Details on the instruments and key assignments of each drum kit

can be found in the Drum Kit List on page 76.

● Example: 109 Standard Kit 1

To check which “Standard Kit 1” percussion sounds are assigned

to each key, look at the icons printed above the keys.

109 Standard Kit 1 116 Jazz Kit

110 Standard Kit 2 117 Brush Kit

111 Room Kit 118 Symphony Kit

112 Rock Kit 119 SFX Kit 1

113 Electronic Kit 120 SFX Kit 2

114 Analog Kit 121 Sound Effect Kit

115 Dance Kit

Ride Cymbal 1

Tambourine

Cowbell

Vibraslap

Bongo L

Hi-Hat Open

Crash Cymbal 1

Hand Clap

Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Pedal

Open Rim Shot

Side Stick

Castanet

Sticks

Brush Tap

Brush Slap

Conga H Open

Timbale L

Agogo L

Maracas

Guiro Short

Claves

Cuica Mute

Tr ia ngle Mute

Shaker

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal Cup

Splash Cymbal

Crash Cymbal 2

Ride Cymbal 2

Bongo H

Conga H Mute

Mid Tom L

Mid Tom H

High Tom

Snare H Hard

Floor Tom L

Low Tom

Floor Tom H

Bass Drum Hard

Bass Drum

Snare M

Snare Roll

Snare H Soft

Bass Drum Soft

Seq Click H

Brush Swirl

Brush Tap Swirl

Conga L

Timbale H

Agogo H

Cabasa

Samba Whistle H

Samba Whistle L

Guiro Long

Wood Block H

Wood Block L

Cuica Open

Tr iangle Open

Jingle Bells

Bell Tree

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 17

Quick Guide

Step

Fun Sounds

This instrument also includes a wide range of unique

sound effects. Try out each key and enjoy the sounds!

As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound of

a dog barking, running water, a creaking door and many

other unique effects.

Press the [VOICE] button.

Select the Sound Effect kit.

Select Voice number 121 by using the number buttons [0]–[9],

[+], [-].

Try out each key.

Try out each key and enjoy the sounds. Don’t forget the black

keys!

You’ll be able to play various sound effects from the keyboard:

barking, braying, yelling, and much more.

After trying out these sounds, press the [PORTABLE GRAND]

button to reset the instrument Voice to the default setting of Voice

“001 Grand Piano.”

SE Kit

121

— Quick Guide —

Step 2 Fun Sounds

18 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Step

Playing Songs

This instrument has 102 built-in Songs.

Listening to a Song.

Press the [SONG] button.

The Song number and name are displayed.

Select the desired Song by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

Refer to the Song List on next page.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The Song will begin playing.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

Select and Listen to a Speciﬁc Song

001–102 Built in Songs (see next page)

103–107 User Songs (Songs you record yourself).

108– Songs transferred from a computer on page 67

Cruisin

001

Song number Song name

Appears when

the Song mode is

active.

•You can play Songs

recorded from the instru-

ment or transferred from a

computer. The procedure

for playing these Songs is

the same as that of the

built-in Songs.

NOTE

— Quick Guide —

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 19

Quick Guide

● Song List

• Songs with an asterisk mark (*) are ones which do not have a left part. Therefore, the lesson is applicable only for the right hand.

• Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original.

•A Song Book is available that includes scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at

the following website.

http://music.yamaha.com/registration/

● Other Operations

[REW] button ........... Fast-reverses the Song if pressed during playback (no sound is heard

during fast reverse). Decreases the measure number if pressed while

playback is stopped.

[FF] button................ Fast-forwards the Song if pressed during playback. Increases the

measure number if pressed while playback is stopped.

[PAUSE] button ........ Temporarily stops playback. Press this button a second time to resume

playback from the point at which it was stopped.

● Using the [DEMO] button

Press the [DEMO] button to play Songs 001, 002, 003, 004, 025, 041, 064,

084, 081, in sequence, and playback will continue repeatedly starting again

from the ﬁrst Song 001.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] button.

No. Song Name

TOP PICKS

001 Cruisin

002 Jessica

003 Castaway

CLASSICAL MELODIES

004*

Waltz (The Sleeping Beauty)

(P. I. Tchaikovsky)

005* Air (Orchestral Suite) (J. S. Bach)

006* Minuetto/Boccherini (L. Boccherini)

007* Siciliano/J. S. Bach (J. S. Bach)

008* Menuet (L’Arlésienne) (G. Bizet)

009*

Slavonic Dances op.72-2

(A. Dvorák)

010*

Largo (From the New World)

(A. Dvorák)

011* Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II)

012*

Romanze/Beethoven

(L. v. Beethoven)

013* Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky)

014* Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré)

015* Méditation (Thaïs) (J. Massenet)

016* Serenade/Haydn (F. J. Haydn)

017* Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi)

018*

Danza dell’Ore (La Gioconda)

(A. Ponchielli)

019*

Le Cygne (Le Carnaval des

Animaux) (C. Saint-Saëns)

020*

L’ éléphant (Le Carnaval des

Animaux) (C. Saint-Saëns)

021*

Fossiles (Le Carnaval des Animaux)

(C. Saint-Saëns)

022*

Wachet auf, ruft uns die Stimme

BWV. 645 (J. S. Bach)

TRADITIONAL MELODIES

023* Greensleeves (Traditional)

024* Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster)

025* Amazing Grace (Traditional)

026* Ring de Banjo (S. C. Foster)

027* O du lieber Augustin (Traditional)

028* London Bridge (Traditional)

029* Aura Lee (Traditional)

030* Aloha Oe (Q. Liliuokalani)

031 Turkey in the Straw (Traditional)

032 On Top of Old Smoky (Traditional)

033 Grandfather’s Clock (H. C. Work)

034 Pop Goes the Weasel (Traditional)

035 Mary Had a Little Lamb (Traditional)

036 Yankee Doodle (Traditional)

037 Mufﬁn Man (Traditional)

038 Ten Little Indians (Traditional)

039

When the Saints Go Marching In

(Traditional)

040 Little Brown Jug (Traditional)

041 Down by the Riverside (Traditional)

042

When Irish Eyes Are Smiling

(E. R. Ball)

043 Oh! Susanna (S. C. Foster)

044

Battle Hymn of the Republic

(Traditional)

045 American Patrol (F. W. Meacham)

046

I’ve Been Working on the Railroad

(Traditional)

047 My Darling Clementine (Traditional)

048 Camptown Races (S. C. Foster)

049 Red River Valley (Traditional)

050 Jingle Bells (J. S. Pierpont)

PIANO SOLO

051 Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven)

052

Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien”

(F. Chopin)

053

Menuett/Beethoven

(L. v. Beethoven)

054

Andante grazioso (Sonate K.331)

(W. A. Mozart)

055 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin)

056

Melodie (Album für die Jugend)

(R. Schumann)

057

Fröhlicher Landmann (Album für die

Jugend) (R. Schumann)

058

Von fremden Ländern und

Menschen (Kinderszenen)

(R. Schumann)

059

Träumerei (Kinderszenen)

(R. Schumann)

060

Thema (Impromptus D.935-3)

(F. Schubert)

061 Menuett BWV. Anh.116 (J. S. Bach)

062 Invention Nr.1 (J. S. Bach)

063 Gavotte/J. S. Bach (J. S. Bach)

064 Arietta/Grieg (E. Grieg)

065 To a Wild Rose (E. A. MacDowell)

066 Tango/Albeniz (I. Albéniz)

067

La Fille aux Cheveux de Lin

(C. A. Debussy)

068 La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller)

No. Song Name

069 Pastorale (J. F. Burgmüller)

070

The Last Rose of Summer

(Traditional)

071 Annie Laurie (Traditional)

072

Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair

(S. C. Foster)

073 The Entertainer (S. Joplin)

PIANO ENSEMBLE

074 Londonderry Air (Traditional)

075 Die Lorelei (F. Silcher)

076 Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop)

077 Old Folks at Home (S. C. Foster)

078 Scarborough Fair (Traditional)

079 Loch Lomond (Traditional)

080

Twinkle Twinkle Little Star

(Traditional)

081 Three Blind Mice (Traditional)

082

Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär

(Traditional)

083

Believe Me If All Those Endearing

Young Charms (Traditional)

084 Funiculi Funicula (L. Denza)

085 Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin)

086

Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L’adieu”

(F. Chopin)

087

Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod

(J. S. Bach/C. F. Gounod)

088

Jesus bleibet meine Freude

(J. S. Bach)

089 Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach)

090

Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov.

(W. A. Mozart)

091

Der Vogelfänger bin ich ja

(W. A. Mozart)

092

Romanze (Serenade K.525)

(W. A. Mozart)

093

Die Schlittenfahrt K.605-3

(W. A. Mozart)

094 Ave Verum Corpus (W. A. Mozart)

095 Liebesträume Nr.3 (F. Liszt)

096 O Mio Babbino Caro (G. Puccini)

097 Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet)

098 Frühlingslied (F. Mendelssohn)

099 Ode to Joy (L. v. Beethoven)

100 O Christmas Tree (Traditional)

101 Deck the Halls (Traditional)

102 Silent Night (F. Gruber)

No. Song Name

Step 3 Playing Songs

20 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Step

Play with a Style

The Style feature provides backing and rhythm parts in a wide variety of musical categories,

including rock, blues, techno and much more. Here’s how to play a rhythm of a Style. The rhythm

sound consists of percussion instruments.

Press the [STYLE] button.

The Style number and name are displayed.

Select a Style.

Select the desired Style by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+],

[-].

Refer to the Style List on page 76.

You can also select commercially available Style Files. To do this

load the Style Files from the computer to the instrument, and then

the information on transferring data on page 67 and registering

styles on page 54.) You can play Style Files in the same way that

you play the internal styles. If the Style File has not been regis-

tered, “No Data” will be displayed when selecting style number

107.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The Style rhythm will start.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

Selecting a rhythm of a Style

8BtModrn

001

Style number Style name

Appears when

the Style mode is

active.

HH Light

016

• Since the Pianist category

Styles (098–106) have no

rhythm parts, no sound will

be produced if you start

rhythm-only playback. To

use these Styles, turn on

the auto accompaniment

and play the keyboard as

described on pages 21–22.

(The bass and chord

accompaniment parts will

sound.)

NOTE

— Quick Guide —

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 21

Quick Guide

On the previous page, you’ve learned how to select your favorite rhythm of a Style. Here, you’ll

learn how to expand on that rhythm with bass and chord backing, and use all of it as your accom-

paniment as you play.

Press the [STYLE] button and then select a Style.

Turn auto accompaniment on.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button again to turn the auto accom-

paniment off.

Turn SYNC START on.

Press the [SYNC START] button.

When the Sync Start standby mode is engaged, Style playback

will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment

range of the keyboard. You can turn off Sync Start standby mode

by pressing the [SYNC START] button.

Playing with a Style

● When auto accompaniment is on ...

The keys to the left of the Split Point (54; F#2) will play only

chords.

This is known as the “Auto Accompaniment range.”

8BtModrn

001

Appears when auto

accompaniment is on

•You can change the Split

Point. Refer to “Setting the

Split Point” on page 46.

NOTE

Split Point (54; F#2)

Auto Accompani-

ment range

8BtModrn

001

Flashes when Sync

Start is on.

Step 4 Play with a Style

22 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

The Style will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in the

accompaniment range of the keyboard.

Not sure how to play chords? No problem! This instrument is

capable of playing chords even if you only play one key.

Try playing one, two or three keys (any notes will do) in the auto

accompaniment range of the keyboard. Different keys will pro-

duce different results.

Refer to page 55 for detailed instructions for playing chords.

Try playing other chords with your left hand and play a melody with

your right hand.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]

button.

Auto Accompani-

ment range

Split Point

Auto Accompani-

ment range

Split Point

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 23

Quick Guide

Step

Play Using the Music

Database

You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best voice and

style for the type of music you want to play ... simply select the appropriate style from the Music

Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds

and style!

Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

A Music Database name will appear in the display.

Select a Music Database.

Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page

80 of the manual, use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select

a music database. Select one that matches the image of the song

you intend to play.

For this example select the “051 MoonLit”.

Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right.

The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord

to the left of the split point (page 46). Refer to page 55 for infor-

mation about playing chords.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

AlvFever

001

MoonLit

051

Split Point

— Quick Guide —

Step 5 Play Using the Music Database

24 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Step

Play With The Metronome

The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Play and set the

tempo that is most comfortable for you.

Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [METRONOME ON/

OFF] button.

To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] but-

ton again.

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to display the tempo.

Set the metronome tempo by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

The tempo can be adjusted between 11–280.

Start the metronome

Starting the metronome

Setting the metronome tempo

GrandPno

001

Displays the

current beat.

Tempo

090

Tempo value

— Quick Guide —

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 25

Quick Guide

In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature.

Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button for longer than a

second to select the number of beats per measure function “Time-

SigN”.

Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the number of beats

per measure.

A chime will sound on the ﬁrst beat of each measure while the

other beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at

the beginning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”.

The available range is from 0 through 60. Select 5 for this exam-

ple.

Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times to select the beat

length function “TimeSigD”.

The currently selected beat length will be displayed.

Use the [+], [-] to select the beat length.

Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note,

quarter note, eighth note, or 16

note). Select 8 for this example.

Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat

TimeSigN

Number of beats per measure.

Hold for longer

than a second.

• The metronome time signa-

ture will synchronize to a

style or song that is playing,

so these parameters cannot

be changed while a style or

song is playing.

NOTE

TimeSigD

The length of one beat.

Step 6 Play With The Metronome

26 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “MetroVol”

appears.

Set the metronome volume by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

Setting the Metronome Volume

MetroVol

100

Metronome Volume

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 27

Quick Guide

Step

Record your own

performance

You can record up to ﬁve of your own performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song numbers

103–107). Think of each User Song as a kind of basket or drawer for storing your recording.

Remember that you can also record a Style (containing chord changes) along with your own per-

formance.

Press the [REC] button.

After you’ve selected the desired User Song for recording, you

can select a Style to be recorded as well. To do this, press the

[STYLE] button and select the Style number while the ACMP

indication is on.

You can turn off the Record mode by pressing the [REC] button

again ( and stop ﬂashing).

Start recording.

When you play the keyboard, recording will begin.

By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when the Auto

Accompaniment is set to on, the Style starts sounding and is

recorded with your performance.

When Auto Accompaniment is set to off, only your keyboard per-

formance is recorded.

Recording Your Performance

User 1

rEC

001

Flashes

The lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song

(Song numbers 103–107) available for record-

ing is displayed. If you want to select the Song

you will be recording, select the desired Song

number by using the [+] and [-] buttons.

•A total of approximately

10,000 notes or 5,500

chord changes can be

recorded to the ﬁve User

Songs.

NOTE

• Accompaniment cannot be

turned on or off once the

[REC] button is pressed.

NOTE

• If all User Songs (Song

numbers 103–107) con-

tain recorded data, Song

103 will automatically be

selected. In this case, you

will record over and erase

any previous data in Song

103, so be careful that

you won’t be erasing any

material you want to

keep!

CAUTION

Split Point

— Quick Guide —

Step 7 Record your own performance

28 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Stop recording.

Pressing the [START/STOP] button stops recording and writes

the data to the User Song. (A “Writing!” message is shown.)

To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/

STOP] button.

The User Songs are organized into two tracks: Track 1 and Track 2. You can specify the track you

want to record to.

If you start recording by specifying a track, the track will be overwrit-

ten (existing data in the track is deleted and replaced with the new

recording).

Only your keyboard performance can be recorded to Track 1. Either a

Style or your performance can be recorded to Track 2, resulting in a

User Song like that depicted below.

●In order to record with the Style, turn the Auto Accompa-

niment to on (see Steps 1–2 on page 21), and then record

according to the instructions.

●

In order to record only your performance, turn the Auto Accom-

paniment to off and record according to the normal steps.

Recording to a speciﬁed track

About track recording

•Never attempt to turn the

power off when a “Writ-

ing!” message is shown

in the display. Doing so

can damage the ﬂash

memory and result in a

loss of data.

CAUTION

•Keep in mind that any

kind of power failure dur-

ing recording—such as

the power being turned

off, the AC adaptor being

plugged/unplugged or the

batteries running down—

will result in data loss.

CAUTION

• Use the Musicsoft

Downloader to backup the

User Songs to a computer

(page 65).

NOTE

(The “ACMP ON” lights.)

(The “ACMP ON” is unlit.)

• Record following the steps

in the previous page, and

your performance will be

recorded to Track 1 and the

Style (if you are playing

one) will be recorded to

Tra ck 2.

NOTE

User Song

Recording to the

speciﬁed track

* When playing

the Style

Data that can be

recorded to Track 2

Data that can be

recorded to Track 1

Your own keyboard

performance only

Style playback* (including

chord changes) or your

own keyboard performance

•You cannot record the

Reverb Level, metronome

click, or the Transpose and

Tuning settings.

• The settings and buttons

below cannot be changed,

or if changed, the new set-

tings cannot be recorded if

entered during the record-

ing process.

ACMP ON/OFF, split

point, reverb type, chorus

type, harmony type,

[FUNCTION] button,

[PORTABLE GRAND]

button, [SOUND

EFFECT KIT] button.

NOTE

Track 1

Your own keyboard

performance

Track 2

Style

Track 1

Your own keyboard

performance

Track 2

Your own keyboard

performance

User Song User Song

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 29

Quick Guide

Turn ACMP (auto accompaniment) on or off,

depending on what you want to record.

If you want to record Style playback, turn ACMP on. If you

want to record only your own keyboard performance, turn

ACMP off.

Specify the track you want to record.

Specify the track 2 when you want to record the Style.

When you want to record your own keyboard performance, you

can specify either track.

● Recording to Track 1

Press the [REC] button and [REC TRACK 1] button

simultaneously.

● Recording to Track 2

Press the [REC] button and [REC TRACK 2] button

simultaneously.

Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the User Song you want to record.

If you want to record Style playback to Track 2, press the

[STYLE] button and select the desired Style.

Start recording

Perform steps 2 and 3 on pages 27–28.

By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when the Auto

Accompaniment is set to on, the Style starts sounding and is

recorded. Only your performance is recorded by playing the

keyboard (any key is OK) when the Auto Accompaniment is set

to off.

Specifying track recording

•Keep in mind that both Tracks

1 and 2 will be overwritten

with new data if you record

without specifying the tracks.

• The both “L” and “R” ﬂashes,

this indicates that you have

speciﬁed Track 1 when the

Auto Accompaniment is on. If

you want to record your own

performance, press the

[TRACK 2] button to stop the

“L” ﬂashing. If you want to

record a Style, press the

[REC] button to cancel the

recording, and repeat the pro-

cedure from the beginning.

NOTE

User 1

rEC

001

Flashes when track 1 is

selected for recording.

Press simulta-

neously

User 1

rEC

001

Flashes

when track 2

is selected

for recording.

Lights when recorded data exists.

Tu r ns off when there is no recorded data, or when Mute

is set to on (page 40) to turn off playback of the track.

Press simulta-

neously

User 3

rEC

•You can record a new track

while listening to a previously

recorded track (the track indi-

cation will appear). You can

also mute recorded tracks

(the track will disappear)

while recording a new track

by pressing the desired track

button.

NOTE

Step 7 Record your own performance

30 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Deleting an entire User Song

Press the [SONG] button and select the User Song you want to

delete by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

Press and hold the [REC] button for longer than a second.

The Song Delete display appears.

You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] but-

ton.

Press the [+/YES] button.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] but-

ton.

Press the [+/YES] button to delete the Song.

“Writing!” message will appear while the track is

being deleted.

Deleting User Songs

•You cannot delete a speciﬁc

track from a User Song.

NOTE

User 1

103

ClrUser1

YEs

Hold for longer

than a second.

Sure?

YEs

Writing!

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 31

Backup and Initialization

Backup

The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even

when the power is turned off. If you want to initialize the settings, use the

Initialize operation as explained below. You can also save the settings as

backup data to your computer, by using the Musicsoft Downloader (MSD)

software. Refer to the section “Transferring a backup ﬁle from the PSR-

E313/YPT-310 to a computer” on page 68.

Initialization

This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s ﬂash memory and

restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures

are provided.

To clear data backed up to the internal ﬂash memory (described above),

turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while holding

the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased

and the default values restored.

To clear Song data and Style data that has been transferred to the internal

ﬂash memory from a computer, simultaneously hold down the highest

white key and the three highest black keys on the keyboard and turn the

power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch.

● Parameters that are saved in backup:

• User Songs

• Style number 107

• Touch Response on/off setting

• The following Function settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch

Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome

Volume, Demo Cancel, Panel Sustain

Backup Clear

Flash Clear

• When you execute the

Backup Clear operation,

backup parameters will

be cleared.

CAUTION

• When you execute the

Flash Clear operation,

Song data and Style data

you have purchased and

downloaded will also be

cleared. Make sure to

save your important data

by transferring to a com-

puter using Musicsoft

Downloader (page 68).

CAUTION

32 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

GrandPno

001

Turn down the volume by turning the

[MASTER VOLUME] control to the left

and press the [STANDBY/ON] switch to

turn on the power.

Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again

to turn the power OFF.

Turning the power on

Turn the [MASTER VOLUME] dial.

Adjusting the volume

Rotate coun-

terclockwise

to lower the

volume.

Rotate clock-

wise to

increase the

volume.

Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing

the [SONG] or [STYLE] button to start play-

back of the selected Song or Style (rhythm).

About the [START/STOP] button

The “Press & Hold” symbol that

appears next to some buttons indicates

that the button can be pressed and

held for longer than a second to call

up a related or different function.

The “Press & Hold” Symbol

Basic Operation and Displays

Basic Operation

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 33

Basic Operation and Displays

When you select a basic function, the name and

number of the currently selected Song, Style and

Voice is shown. From this display, you can select

the desired Song, Style or Voice.

Press a button to select a basic function

Press the [SONG] button to

select a Song.

Press the [STYLE] button to

select a Style.

Press the [VOICE] button to

select a Voice.

The [FUNCTION] button contains

34 settings.

Each time you press the [FUNC-

TION] button, the setting item is

selected in sequence, and the value of

the selected item can be changed in

the display.

Function Settings (page 59)

● Number buttons [0]–[9]

The number buttons can be used to directly enter a Song,

Style or Voice number or parameter value.

For numbers that start with one or two zeroes, the ﬁrst

zeroes can be omitted

● [+], [-] buttons

Press the [+] button brieﬂy to increase the value by 1, or

press the [-] button brieﬂy to decrease the value by 1. Press

and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease

the value in the corresponding direction.

Set the number or value

Press number but-

tons [0], [0], [2].

BritePno

002

Example: Selecting Voice 002, Bright Piano.

Press brieﬂy to

decrease.

Press brieﬂy to

increase.

34 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation and Displays

GrandPno

001

003

The Main display shows all of the current basic settings for Song, Style and Voice. It also includes a range

of indicators that show the on/off status for various functions.

Display

Displays the melody and chord notes of a Song

when the Song lesson function is in use, or the

notes of chords you specify when the Dictio-

nary function is in use. At other times the notes

you play on the keyboard are displayed.

Notation

•Any notes occurring below or above the staff are

indicated by “8va” in the notation.

•For a few speciﬁc chords, not all notes may be

shown in the notation section of the display. This is

due to space limitations in the display.

NOTE

Information related to the

Song/recording tracks is shown

here. (See pages 27 and 40.)

Lit: Track contains data

Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data

Flashing: Track is selected as recording track

Indicates the current measure

during playback of a Song.

Indicates the beat of the cur-

rent Style or Song with ﬂash-

ing arrows.

Song/recording track display

Measure

Beat Display

003

Indicates the name of the

chord currently being

played back, or the name of

the chord being played on the keyboard.

Appears when the auto

accompaniment is on.

Indicates notes currently

being played.

Indicates the melody and

chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson

function is in use. Also indicates the notes of a

chord—either when playing a chord or when

using the Dictionary function.

Chord Display

ACMP ON

Keyboard Display

Appears when the Dual func-

tion is on (page 13).

Appears when the Harmony

function is on (page 42).

Appears when the Split func-

tion is on (page 14).

Appears when Reverb is on

(page 43).

Appears when Touch

Response is on (page 45).

DUAL

HARMONY

SPLIT

REVERB

TOUCH RESPONSE

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 35

Song Lesson

Yamaha Education Suite 5

You can select any Song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands

lesson. Song Lesson lets you learn how to play Songs in three easy steps. Songs that

can be used with the Lesson feature include Songs transferred from a computer to

ﬂash memory (SMF Format 0 only; see page 65). The procedure for transferring songs

are described on page 67.

■ Lesson Flow

■ The practice methods:

Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn) ........ Listen and learn the melody or rhythm of a selected Song.

Lesson 2 (Timing) ...................... Learn to play the notes at the correct timing along with the Song.

Lesson 3 (Waiting)..................... Learn to play the correct notes.

Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn)

There’s no need to play the keyboard in Lesson 1.

The model melody/chords (in other words, the musical material you should

learn) of the part you selected will sound. Listen to it carefully and learn it

well.

1 Select the desired Song for your lesson.

Press the [SONG] button, and then select a Song (referring to the Song

list on page 19) by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-]. If you

want to practice a Song you’ve transferred from a computer, select one

of the Songs beginning from Song number 108.

The instrument includes 102 built in Songs. Some Songs (as shown

below) are intended for use as right-hand lessons, and cannot be used

for left-hand or both-hands lessons.

● Songs for right-hand lesson

Song numbers: 004–030

Select a Song

for your lesson.

Select the part you want

to practice.

Select the practice

method.

Start the

Lesson!

• User Songs cannot be used

for the lesson.

NOTE

•You cannot select the part

during Song playback

before Lesson 1 starts. If a

Song is currently being

played back, stop the Song

ﬁrst, then continue from

Step

NOTE

Chevaler

068

001

Song Lesson

36 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

2 Select the part you want to practice.

Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand

lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a both-

hands lesson. The selected part is displayed.

A “No LPart” message is shown in the display if you select the left part

in one of the Songs 004–030, which do not have left part data. These

Songs cannot be used for left-hand or both-hands lessons.

3 Start Lesson 1.

Press the [LISTEN & LEARN] button to start Lesson 1.

The melody of the part you selected in Step

2 will sound. Listen to it

carefully and learn it well.

4 Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

Right

Left

BothHand

Both-hands lesson

Right-hand lessonLeft-hand lesson

•For songs transferred from

a computer, the “No LPart”

indication does not appear,

even when there is no left

hand part in the song.

NOTE

No LPart

•Even after Lesson 1 has

started and the Song is

playing, you can still select

the part.

• When the melody Voice of

the Song is changed, the

key position shown in the

display may be shifted (in

octave units), depending on

the Voice selected.

•You can select Lessons 1–3

by pressing the [LISTEN &

LEARN], [TIMING] and

[WAITING] buttons, respec-

tively.

NOTE

LISTEN

011

The notation and key positions of the model

melody are shown in the display.

Song Lesson

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 37

Lesson 2 (Timing)

In this lesson, try playing the notes with the correct timing. Simply

concentrate on playing each note in time with the rhythmic accompa-

niment. The correct notes sound even if you play wrong notes as long

as you play in time with the rhythm.

1 Select a Song for your lesson.

2 Select the part you want to prac-

tice.

3 Start Lesson 2.

Press the [TIMING] button to start Lesson 2.

Play the notes shown in the display.

In Lesson 2, simply play each note in time with the music.

4 Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any

time by pressing the [START/STOP]

button.

When the lesson Song has played all the way through in Lesson mode 2 or

3, your performance will be evaluated in four levels: OK, Good, Very

Good, or Excellent.

Good

Very0Good

Excellent

Grade

•You cannot use Dual or Split Voices

during lessons.

• The Split Point is ﬁxed and it can-

not be changed. For the left-hand

lesson, it is ﬁxed at 59 or B2; for

the left-hand chord lesson, it is

ﬁxed at 54 or F

NOTE

•You cannot select the part during

Song playback before Lesson 2

starts. If a Song is currently being

played back, stop the Song ﬁrst,

then continue from Step

NOTE

•Even after Lesson 2 has started

and the Song is playing, you can

still select the part.

NOTE

TIMING

004

Song Lesson

38 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Lesson 3 (Waiting)

In this mode, try playing the correct notes. The notes you should play

appear in the score and the keyboard on the display. The Song pauses until

you play the right note.

1 Select a Song for your lesson.

2 Select the part you want to practice.

3 Start Lesson 3.

Press the [WAITING] button to start Lesson 3.

Play the notes shown in the display.

Try playing the correct notes.

4 Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

•You cannot select the part

during Song playback

before Lesson 3 starts. If a

Song is currently being

played back, stop the Song

ﬁrst, then continue from

Step

NOTE

•Even after Lesson 3 has

started and the Song is

playing, you can still select

the part.

NOTE

WAITING

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 39

Song settings

Changing the Melody Voice

You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other Voice you prefer.

1 Select the Song and play it.

Refer to the section “Playing Songs” on page 18.

2 Select a desired Voice by using the number buttons [0]–

[9], [+], [-].

The selected Voice sounds when you play the keyboard.

If a Song has played through and stopped during this procedure, press

the [START/STOP] button to start playback again.

3 Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a sec-

ond.

“SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds,

indicating that the Voice selected in Step

2 has replaced the Song’s

original melody Voice.

Song Volume

This procedure allows you to adjust the balance between Song playback

and the notes you play on the keyboard by setting the volume of the play-

back sound.

1 Press the [SONG] button.

•You cannot change the mel-

ody Voice of a User Song.

NOTE

HnkyTonk

004

001

Hold for longer than a second.

Song settings

40 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

2 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until

“SongVol” appears.

3 Set the Song Volume by pressing the number buttons

[0]–[9], [+], [-].

Mute

You can mute Track 1 or Track 2 during Song playback.

•Track 1 can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 1] button during

Song playback.

•Track 2 can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 2] button during

Song playback.

You can cancel the mute function by pressing the corresponding track but-

tons, [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] again during Song playback, or by select-

ing any other Song.

Current Song Volume Song Volume

SongVol

100

• Press the [+] and [-] buttons

simultaneously to instantly

reset the value to its default

setting (100).

NOTE

Lit—track contains

data.

Unlit—track is muted

or contains no data.

Cruisin

001

010

Pressing one of the Track but-

tons [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2]

will mute the corresponding

track during Song playback.

Song settings

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 41

Practice Makes Perfect

You can repeatedly practice a section you ﬁnd difﬁcult. This function lets

you specify a section of a Song you want to practice—“A” is the start point

and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback.

1 Play the Song and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of

the section you want to repeat (the “A” point).

“A-REPEAT” will be displayed.

2 Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a second time at the end of the section

you want to repeat (the “B” point). The speciﬁed A-B section of the

Song will now play repeatedly, letting you practice the section over and

over.

You can stop repeat playback by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button.

The A-B REPEAT mode will be canceled and normal playback of the

Song will continue.

Repeat playback of this section

• The repeat start and end

points can be speciﬁed in

one-measure increments.

•You can also set the A-B

Repeat function when the

Song is stopped. Simply

use the [REW] and [FF] but-

tons to select the desired

measures, pressing the [A-

B REPEAT] button for each

point, then start playback.

• If you want to set the start

point “A” at the very begin-

ning of the Song press the

[A-B REPEAT] button

before starting playback of

the Song.

NOTE

REPEAT

A-

REPEAT

A-b

• The A-B Repeat function

will be canceled when you

select another Song or

Style mode.

NOTE

REPEAT

oFF

42 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Play With a Variety of Effects

Adding Harmony

This feature adds harmony notes as well as tremolo or echo effects to the

Main Voice.

1 Press the [HARMONY] button to turn harmony on.

When you don’t want to add harmony notes, press the [HARMONY

ON/OFF] button again to turn Harmony off.

2 Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button for longer than a

second.

“HarmType” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the

Harmony Type.

3 Select a desired Harmony Type by using the number buttons [0]–[9],

[+], [-].

Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 81.

Try playing the keyboard with the harmony function. The effect and

operation of each Harmony Type is different—refer to the section

“How to sound each Harmony Type” on the next page as well as the

Harmony Type List for details.

• When you press the [HAR-

MONY ON/OFF] button to

turn this feature on, the

appropriate Harmony type

for the currently selected

Main Voice is automatically

selected.

NOTE

Appears when harmony is on.

•You can also access the

Harmony Type setting dis-

play by pressing the

[FUNCTION] button sev-

eral times.

• Harmony will be turned off if

the Chord Dictionary func-

tion is used.

NOTE

Trio

Currently selected

Harmony type

Hold for longer

than a second.

Play With a Variety of Effects

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 43

Adding Reverb

Reverb adds the ambience of a room or concert hall to the sound that you

play on the keyboard.

Press the [REVERB ON/OFF] button to turn Reverb on. Reverb is normally

on. You can check how the selected Reverb Type sounds by playing the key-

board. To turn Reverb off, press the [REVERB ON/OFF] button again.

The ideal type is automatically selected whenever you select a Song or

Style, but you can select any of the available Reverb Types.

1 Press and hold the [REVERB ON/OFF] button for longer than a sec-

ond. “REVERB” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by

the Reverb Type.

● How to sound each Harmony Type

To add Reverb

Select a Reverb Type

• The harmony notes can be

added only to the Main

Voice, not to Dual or Split

Voices.

• The keys left of the Split

Point of the keyboard pro-

duce no harmony notes

when the auto accompani-

ment is on (ACMP ON is lit).

NOTE

• Harmony type 01–05

• Harmony type 06–12 (Trill)

• Harmony type 13–19 (Tremolo)

• Harmony type 20–26 (Echo)

You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 59).

Press the right-hand keys while play-

ing chords in the auto accompaniment

range of the keyboard when the Auto

Accompaniment is on (page 21).

Hold down two keys.

Keep holding down the keys.

Appears when

Reverb is on.

Hall2

Currently selected Reverb Type

Hold for longer

than a second.

Play With a Variety of Effects

44 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

2 Select the desired Reverb Type by using the num-

ber buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

Refer to the Reverb Type list on page 81 for

details.

You can adjust the Reverb depth in the Function

Settings (page 59).

Adding Chorus

This effect makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more spacious. The

best-suited Chorus type is automatically selected whenever you select a

Voice; however, you can select any of the available types.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Chorus”

appears.

“Chorus” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the

Chorus Type.

Select a desired Chorus Type by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

Refer to the Chorus Type list on page 81 for details.

You can adjust the Chorus depth independently for the Main, Dual and

Split Voices in the Function Settings (page 59).

Adding Panel Sustain

This function adds a ﬁxed sustain to the keyboard Voices.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Sustain”

item appears.

2 Press the [+] button to turn the Panel Sustain on.

Panel Sustain will be added to the notes you play on the keyboard

when the Panel Sustain is on. To turn it off, press the [-] button.

•You can also access the

Reverb Type setting display

by pressing the [FUNC-

TION] button several times.

NOTE

Currently selected

Chorus Type

Chorus1

Sustain

oFF

Current setting

• See the section “Connect-

ing a footswitch (SUSTAIN

Jack)” on page 9 for infor-

mation on applying sustain

with the optional footswitch.

NOTE

Sustain

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 45

Handy Performance Features

Touch Response Sensitivity

Press the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button to turn Touch Response on.

When Touch Response is on, you can control the volume of notes accord-

ing to how hard you play the keys. Touch Response is normally on. Press

the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button again to turn the Touch Response off. When

Touch Response is off, the same volume will be produced no matter how

hard you play the keys.

When Touch Response is on, you can adjust the sensitivity of the keyboard

in response to keyboard dynamics in three steps. Higher values produce

greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics—in

other words, greater sensitivity.

1 Press and hold the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button for longer than a second.

“TouchSns” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the

current Touch Sensitivity value.

2 Select a Touch Sensitivity setting between 1 and 3 by using the number

buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

Touch Response

Setting the Touch Sensitivity

Appears when Touch

Response is on.

• The Touch Response func-

tion cannot be used for

some Voices (such as

organ), even if the Touch

Response icon appears in

the display.

NOTE

Currently selected Touch Sensitivity

Medium

Hold for longer

than a second.

Handy Performance Features

46 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Setting the Split Point

The Split Point setting can be changed as desired.

The initial default Split Point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can

change it to another key. When you change the Split Point, the auto accom-

paniment range also changes.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “SplitPnt”

appears.

2 Set the Split Point by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

Transpose

The overall pitch of the instrument can be shifted up or down by a maxi-

mum of 1 octave in semitone increments.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Transpos”

appears.

2 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to set the

Transpose value between -12 and +12 as

required.

36 48 60 72 84 96

Split Point—default setting: 54 (F#2)

Currently selected Split Point

Split Point

SplitPnt

054

001

• Press the [+] and [-] buttons

simultaneously to instantly

reset the value to its default

setting (54 or F

2).

NOTE

Current transpose value

Transpos

• The pitch of the Drum Kits

Voices (Voice numbers

109–121) cannot be

changed.

• Press the [+] and [-] buttons

simultaneously to instantly

reset the value to its default

setting (00).

NOTE

Handy Performance Features

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 47

Tuning

You can ﬁne tune the pitch of the entire instrument. The overall tuning of

the instrument can be shifted up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-

cent increments (100 cents = 1 semitone).

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “Tuning”

appears.

2 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] to set the Tuning value

between -100 and +100 as required.

One Touch Setting

Sometimes selecting the ideal Voice to play with a Song or Style can be

confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects the most

suitable Voice for you when you select a Style or Song. Simply select Voice

number “000” to activate this feature.

1 Press the [VOICE] button, and then select Voice number “000” by

using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

This turns the One Touch Setting feature on. One Touch Setting will be

turned off if you select any other Voice number.

Currently tuning value

Tuning

000

• The pitch of the Drum Kits

Voices (Voice numbers

109–121) cannot be

changed.

• Press the [+] and [-] buttons

simultaneously to instantly

reset the value to its default

setting (000).

NOTE

Appears when One Touch Setting is on.

SprnoSax

000

Handy Performance Features

48 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Changing the tempo of the Song/Style

Songs and Styles can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow.

1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo setting in the dis-

play after selecting a Style/Song.

2 Set the Tempo by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

You can also set the Tempo by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] but-

ton at the required tempo—four times for time signatures in 4, and

three times for time signatures in 3.

You can change the Tempo during Style/Song playback by pressing the

[TEMPO/TAP] button just twice.

Adjusting the Voice Parameters

The volume, octave (the pitch of the instrument can be shifted by up or

down in octaves) and Chorus Send Level can be individually adjusted for

the Main, Dual, and Split Voices.

You can adjust each of the parameters above in the Function settings (page

59).

● Main Voice Parameters (page 59)

• Main Voice Volume

• Main Voice Octave

• Main Voice Chorus Send Level

● Dual Voice Parameters (page 60)

• Dual Voice Volume

• Dual Voice Octave

• Dual Voice Chorus Send Level

● Split Voice Parameters (page 60)

• Split Voice Volume

• Split Voice Octave

• Split Voice Chorus Send Level

Current Tempo value

Tempo

116

• Press the [+] and [-] buttons

simultaneously to instantly

reset the value to the

default tempo of a Style or

Song.

NOTE

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 49

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

Various ways to start and stop Style playback

The following three methods can be used to start Style playback. In all

cases you will need to press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto

accompaniment on before actually starting Style playback. Whichever

method you choose, you can press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] before

starting playback. To begin your performance, an introduction will play

automatically, then will automatically switch to the MAIN section when

ﬁnished.

■ Immediate Start

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin rhythm-only playback of the

selected Style.

The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in

the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

■ Chord Start

Press the [SYNC START] button and the beat arrows will begin ﬂash-

ing, indicating that the Sync Start “standby” mode has been engaged.

The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in

the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

■ Tap Start

You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Sim-

ply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at any tempo—4 times for time signa-

tures in 4, and 3 times for time signatures in 3—and the selected Style

rhythm will begin playing at the tapped tempo.

The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in

the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

Starting Style playback

Appears when the auto

accompaniment is on

Immediate Start

Sync Start standby

Style playback begins when

you play a chord

GrandPno

001

Accompani-

ment range

Start at the

tapped tempo

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

50 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

The following three methods can be used to stop Style playback.

■ Immediate Stop

Playback will stop as soon as you press the [START/STOP] button.

■ Stop and Enter Sync Start Mode

If you press the [SYNC START] button during Style playback, playback

will stop immediately and the Sync Start standby mode will be engaged

(beat arrows will ﬂash).

■ Play the Ending and Stop

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button to begin playing an ending sec-

tion. Playback will stop when the ending has played all the way through.

If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button a second time (while the

ending is playing), the ending will play in ritardando (the tempo will

gradually get slower).

Stopping Style playback

Immediate Stop

Sync Start standby

GrandPno

001

Stop immediately and

enter the Sync Start

mode

Stop after ending plays

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 51

Pattern Variation (Sections)

The instrument features a wide variety of Style “sections” (patterns) that allow you to

vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the Song you are playing.

1 Press the [STYLE] button and then select a Style.

2 Turn auto accompaniment on.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.

3 Turn SYNC START on.

Press the [SYNC START] button.

● INTRO section

This is used for the beginning of the Song

When the intro ﬁnishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section.

The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

● MAIN section

This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats

indeﬁnitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and

B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand.

● Fill-in section

This is automatically added before changing the section A and B.

● ENDING section

This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is ﬁnished, the auto accompaniment stops

automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

Intro Main A/B

Auto ﬁllEnding

Appears when the auto accompani-

ment is on.

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

52 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

6 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro

of the selected Style starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For informa-

tion on how to enter chords, see “Playing Auto Accompaniment

Chords” on page 55.

7 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

When the ﬁll-in is ﬁnished, it leads smoothly into the selected main

section A/B.

8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

This switches to the ending section.

When the ending is ﬁnished, the auto accompaniment stops automati-

cally. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by

pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is

playing back.

MAIN A

The name of the selected section—MAIN A

or MAIN B—will be displayed

INTRO≥A

Accompani-

ment range

FILL A≥B

ENDING

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 53

Adjusting the Style Volume

This procedure allows you to adjust the balance between Style playback

and the notes you play on the keyboard by setting the volume of the play-

back sound.

1 Press the [STYLE] button.

2 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the

“StyleVol” appears.

3 Set the Style volume by using the number buttons [0]–

[9], [+], [-].

StyleVol

100

Current Style volume setting Style Volume

• Press the [+] and [-] buttons

simultaneously to instantly

reset the value to its default

setting (100).

NOTE

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

54 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Registering Style Files

This instrument features 106 internal styles, but other styles, such as those

which can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” sufﬁx),

can be registered into style number 107 and used in the same way as the

internal styles.

In order to use the style ﬁle register function, the ﬁle must already have

been transferred from the computer to the instrument. The procedure for

transferring ﬁles from a computer to the instrument is described on page 65

(“Transferring data between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and a computer”).

The procedure described below registers a style ﬁle that has already been

transferred from a computer to the instrument into style number 107.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button as many time as necessary

to select the style ﬁle load function “StyleReg”.

After about 2 seconds the name of a registerable style ﬁle will appear

in the display.

If multiple loadable style ﬁles have been transferred to the instrument,

you can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other ﬁles in sequence.

2 Execute the register operation.

With the name of the style ﬁle you want to register shown in the dis-

play, press the number [0] button.

3 A conﬁrmation message for the register operation will

appear. Press the [+/YES] button to actually register the

ﬁle.

StyleReg

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 55

Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords

You’ve learned in the section “Play with a Style (Accompaniment)” on page 20 that the

“feel” of the Style changes every time you play a chord on the left-hand side of the key-

board. Here, you’ll learn the types of the chords and how to play them in greater detail.

The examples of chords are given here in the key of C.

There are two basic ways (below) you can play the chords on the left-hand side of the

keyboard, while playing the Style (page 21)

■ Easy Chords

■ Standard Chords

Easy Chords

This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the

keyboard using only one, two, or three ﬁngers.

Standard Chords

This method lets you produce accompaniment by playing chords using

normal ﬁngerings in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

36 48 60 72 84 96

Split Point—default setting: 54 (F#2)

• Root notes and the corre-

sponding keys

NOTE

Accompaniment range

•To play a major chord

Press the root note of

the chord.

•To play a minor chord

Press the root note

together with the near-

est black key to the left

of it.

•To play a seventh chord

Press the root note together

with the nearest white key to

the left of it.

•

To play a minor seventh chord

Press the root note together

with the nearest white and

black keys to the left of it

(three keys altogether).

( )

(9)

( )

(9)

Caug

( )

CmM

( )

(9)

CmM

( )

CmM

(9)

( )

Cdim

(9)

( )

(13)

( )

(b9)

( )

(b13)

Csus

1+2+5

( )

(9)

(#11)

( )

(b5)

( )

(#11)

(#9)

( )

C aug

(

11)

( )

CM aug

( )

C sus

( )

* Notes enclosed in parentheses are optional; the chords will be recognized without them.

Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords

56 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

● Recognized Standard Chords Chart

* These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary function.

Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display

Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C C

Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C(9) C(9)

Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 C6

Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6(9) C6(9) *

Major seventh [M7]

1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - 7

CM7 CM7

Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7(9) CM7(9) *

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7

CM7(#11) CM7(#11)*

Flatted ﬁfth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5C(b5) Cb5 *

Major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7b5 CM7b5 *

Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4 Csus4

Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 Caug Caug

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug CM7aug *

Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm

Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm(9) Cm(9)

Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6 Cm6

Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7 Cm7

Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7(9) Cm7(9)

Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7(11) Cm7(11) *

Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7 CmM7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7(9) CmM7(9) *

Minor seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Cm7b5 Cm7b5

Minor major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7b5 CmM7b5 *

Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Cdim Cdim

Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7 Cdim7

Seventh [7]

1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - b7

C7 C7

Seventh ﬂatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(b9) C7(b9)

Seventh add ﬂatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 C7(b13) C7(b13)

Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(9) C7(9)

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7

C7(#11) C7(#11)

Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7(13) C7(13)

Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(#9) C7(#9)

Seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7C7b5C7b5 *

Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C7aug C7aug

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C7sus4 C7sus4

One plus two plus ﬁve [1+2+5] 1 - 2 - 5 C1+2+5 C *

• Notes in parentheses can

be omitted.

• Playing two same root keys

in the adjacent octaves pro-

duces accompaniment

based only on the root.

•A perfect ﬁfth (1+5) pro-

duces accompaniment

based only on the root and

ﬁfth which can be used with

both major and minor

chords.

• The chord ﬁngerings listed

are all in “root” position, but

other inversions can be

used—with the following

exceptions: m7, m7

5, 6,

m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7

6(9), 1+2+5

•Inversion of the 7sus4 and

m7(11) chords are not rec-

ognized if the notes shown

in parentheses are omitted.

• The auto accompaniment

will sometimes not change

when related chords are

played in sequence (e.g.

some minor chords fol-

lowed by the minor sev-

enth).

•Two-note ﬁngerings will pro-

duce a chord based on the

previously played chord.

NOTE

Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 57

Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary

The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord dictionary” that

shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the

name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it.

1 Press and hold the [WAITING] button for longer than a second.

“Dict.” will appear in the display.

2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh)

chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled

“ROOT .” (The note doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown

in the display.

3 Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard

labeled “CHORD TYPE .” (The note doesn’t sound.)

The notes you should play for the speciﬁed chord (root note and chord

type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard

diagram.

To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons.

4 Try playing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the key-

board, checking the indications in the display.

When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your suc-

cess and the chord name in the display ﬂashes.

Dict.

Hold for longer

than a second.

Dict.

001

Keys for root

dictionary

Keys for chord type

dictionary

• Major chords are usually

indicated by the root name

only. For example, the indi-

cation “C” in a score refers

to a “C Major” chord. To

look up the ﬁngering for a

major chord press the root

key and then the M chord

type key.

NOTE

Dict.

001

Individual notes of chord

(keyboard)

Notation of chord

Chord name (root

and type)

Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords

58 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

■ About chords

Playing two or more notes together simultaneously creates a “chord.”

Playing a note together with two other notes spaced three notes (steps) apart—such as the

notes C, E and G—creates a harmonious sound. Chords like these are called “triads” and

they play an important role in most music.

Taking the chord above as an example, the lowest note of this triad is called the “root note.” This is the central note

sound, and it supports or anchors the rest of the notes chord.

You’ll notice that the middle note of the chord above (E) is the third step in the succession of scale notes—C, D, then E.

There are two types of “thirds” in chords: major thirds and minor thirds.

We’ll also alter the top note of our original chord and make three additional chords, as shown below. (The captions indi-

cate the intervals between each of the notes.)

The basic characteristics of the chord sound are same, no matter if we change the order of the notes from bottom to top,

or if we add other same name notes in different octaves. Beautiful sounding harmonies can be built in this manner, and

emotional music can be created by playing different chords one after the other according to commonly accepted rules.

Harmony determines the nature of chords, and music is created based on harmony.

● Chord names

From the chord name, you can tell at a glance what type of chord it is and which notes

make up the chord. Understanding the basic structure of chords is very useful—once

you’re familiar with this, you’ll be quickly and easily play chords by looking at the

names that appear above the notation.

● Chord types (These chords are among those that can be recognized by the Fingered method.)

3rd

Root

3rd

Minor third—three half steps from the rootMajor third—four half steps from the root

◆ Major chord

aug

dim

Minor 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Minor 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Minor 3rd Minor 3rd

◆ Minor chord ◆ Augmented chord ◆ Diminished chord

Root note

Chord type

sus4

Suspended 4

Perfect 5

Perfect 4

Flatted 7

Major chord

Minor 7

Flatted 7

Minor chord

Major 7

Major chord

mM7

Minor/major 7

Major 7

Minor chord

(

)

, ﬂatted 5

Flatted 5

chord

(

)

Minor 7

, ﬂatted 5

Flatted 5

7sus4

, suspended 4

Flatted 7

Suspended 4

chordMinor 7

chord

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 59

Function Settings

The [FUNCTION] button gives you access to a variety of operations related to adjust-

ing or enhancing the sound and making settings for connection to external devices.

Select the item and change the value

There are 34 different items that can be set.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until

desired item appears.

Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed 34 function items are

displayed in sequence. The description and display sample is provided

on the Function Setting List on page 59–60.

2 Set the value by using the number but-

tons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

For on/off settings or the PC Mode setting, use

[+]/[-] buttons.

● Function Setting List

Item Display Range/settings Description

Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style.

Song Volume

SongVol

000–127 Determines the volume of the Song.

Transpose

TransPos

-12–00–12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone incre-

ments.

Tuning

-100–000–100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments.

Split Point

SplitPnt

000–127

(C-2–G8)

Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the

Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split

(lower) and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and

Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the

same value.

Touch Sensitivity

TouchSns

1 (Soft)

2 (Medium)

3 (Hard)

When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of

the feature.

Style Register

StyleReg

001–nnn Select and register a style ﬁle from ﬂash ﬁles that are loaded

from computer.

Main Voice Volume

M.Volume

000–127 Determines the volume of the Main Voice.

Main Voice Octave

M.Octave

-2–0–2 Determines the octave range for the Main Voice.

Main Voice Chorus

Send Level

M.Chorus

000–127 Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

StyleVol

100

Value Function item

Function Settings

60 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Dual Voice

D.Voice

001–482 Selects the Dual Voice.

Dual Voice Volume

D.Volume

000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual Voice.

Dual Voice Octave

D.Octave

-2–0–2 Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice.

Dual Voice Chorus Send

Level

D.Chorus

000–127 Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Split Voice

S.Voice

001–482 Selects the Split Voice.

Split Voice Volume

S.Volume

000–127 Determines the volume of the Split Voice.

Split Voice Octave

S.Octave

-2–0–2 Determines the octave range for the Split Voice.

Split Voice Chorus Send

Level

S.Chorus

000–127 Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Reverb Type

Reverb

01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10).

Refer to the Reverb Type list on page 81.

Reverb Level

RevLevel

000–127 Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the

Reverb effect.

Chorus Type

Chorus

1–5 Determines the Chorus Type, including off (05).

Refer to the Chorus Type list on page 81.

Panel Sustain

Sustain

ON/OFF Determines whether or not Panel Sustain is always applied to

the Main/Dual/Split Voices. Panel Sustain is applied continu-

ously when ON, or not applied when OFF.

Harmony Type

HarmType

01–26 Determines the Harmony Type.

Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 81.

Harmony Volume

HarmVol

000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect when Harmony

type 1–5 is selected.

PC Mode

PC0mode

OFF/PC1/PC2 Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer

(page 63).

Local On/Off

Local

ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the

internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF).

External Clock

ExtClock

ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the inter-

nal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON).

Initial Setup Send

InitSend

YES/NO Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer.

Use the [+] button to transmit the data.

Time Signature

Numerator

TimeSigN

00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome.

Time Signature

Denominator

TimeSigD

Half note, Quarter

note, Eighth note,

Sixteenth note

Sets the length of each metronome beat.

Metronome Volume

MetroVol

000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome.

Lesson Track (R)

R-Part

01–16 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson.

The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 trans-

ferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Trans-

ferred Songs for Lessons” on page 68.

Lesson Track (L)

L-Part

01–16 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson.

The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 trans-

ferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Trans-

ferred Songs for Lessons” on page 68

Demo Cancel

D-Cancel

ON/OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When

this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the

[DEMO] button is pressed.

Item Display Range/settings Description

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 61

About MIDI

The instrument features a MIDI terminals that can be connected to other MIDI instru-

ments and devices for expanded musical functionality.

What is MIDI?

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a world-standard interface

for communication between electronic musical instruments and music

devices. When MIDI-equipped instruments are connected via a MIDI

cable, it becomes possible to transfer performance and setting data between

them for signiﬁcantly enhanced performance and production potential.

What You Can Do With MIDI

•Transferring performance and setting data between the PSR-E313/YPT-

310 and MIDI-equipped instruments or computers. (page 62)

•Transferring the data between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and computers.

(page 65)

• Connect the PSR-E313/YPT-310 to external equipment only after turning off

power for all devices. Then, turn on the power, ﬁrst to the PSR-E313/YPT-310,

then to the connected external equipment.

CAUTION

About MIDI

62 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Transferring Performance Data To and From Another Instrument

By connecting the PSR-E313/YPT-310 to other MIDI devices or a computer,

the performance data of the instrument can be used on those other MIDI

devices or computer, and also the performance data from other MIDI devices

and computer can be received and sounded with the PSR-E313/YPT-310.

● When the instrument is connected with another MIDI device, it

transmits/receives performance data.

● When the instrument is connected with a computer, it transmits/

receives performance data.

■ MIDI settings

These settings should be made when transmitting/receiving performance

data to a connected MIDI device or computer.

Local Control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument

are sounded by its internal tone generator system; the internal tone genera-

tor is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off.

On ........ This is the normal setting in which notes played on the instru-

ment’s keyboard are sounded by the internal tone generator

system. Data received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal

will also be played by the internal tone generator.

Off ....... With this setting the instrument itself produces no sound

(keyboard performance, Harmony, or Style playback), but the

performance data is transmitted via the MIDI terminal. Data

received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal will also be

played by the internal tone generator.

You can set the Local Control in the Function Settings (page 59).

Local Settings

MIDI device

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

PSR-E313/

YPT-310

A USB-MIDI interface

(such as the Yamaha UX16)

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

USB

PSR-E313/

YPT-310

• If you can’t get any sound

out of the instrument, Local

Control may be the most

likely cause. Playing the

keyboard results in no

sound when Local is set to

OFF.

NOTE

About MIDI

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 63

These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own

internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON).

On......... The instrument’s time based functions will be synchronized

to the clock from an external device connected to the MIDI

terminal.

Off ........ The instrument uses its own internal clock (default).

You can set the External Clock in the Function Settings (page 59).

The PC settings instantly reconﬁgure all important MIDI settings (as

shown below). The selections are PC1, PC2 and OFF.

● The chart of PC Settings

* Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook.

Digital Music Notebook is a major new multimedia platform for music tuition and

performance. Visit the website below for more information on the latest version of

Digital Music Notebook and how to install it.

www.digitalmusicnotebook.com

** Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during

Song playback.

*** Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during

Style playback.

**** Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted

(ON) or not (OFF).

1 Press and hold the [DEMO] button for longer than a second to call up

the PC Mode.

2 Select PC1, PC2, or OFF by using the [+], [-] buttons.

External Clock Settings

PC Mode

PC1 PC2* OFF

LOCAL Off Off On

EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off

SONG OUT** Off Off On

STYLE OUT*** Off Off On

KEYBOARD OUT**** Off On On

• If External Clock is ON and

no clock signal is being

received from an external

device, the Song, Style, and

metronome functions will

not start.

NOTE

• Song Out, Style Out and

Keyboard Out can only be

changed by the PC set-

ting. They cannot be set

independently.

• User Songs can be used

with Song Out.

NOTE

PC mode

oFF

Hold for longer

than a second.

About MIDI

64 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital

Music Notebook application on your computer (via the MIDI connection)

—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the panel.

● Remote control keys

PSR-E313/YPT-310: To use the remote control functions, simultaneously

hold down the lowest two keys on the keyboard (C1 and C#1) and press the

appropriate key (shown below).

Sends the PSR-E313/YPT-310 panel settings to an external MIDI device.

When recording a PSR-E313/YPT-310 performance to an external

sequencer or similar equipment, you can use this function to send the cur-

rent PSR-E313/YPT-310 panel settings so that when the sequence is played

back the original panel settings are automatically restored.

You can set Initial Send in the Function settings (page 59).

Remote Control of MIDI Devices

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Panel Setting Transmission (Initial Send)

• Remote control of MIDI

devices will function inde-

pendently of the PC2 mode.

NOTE

C#1

C6: Fast forward

B5: Start

A5: Stop

G5: Rewind

F5: Top (move to the beginning of

the song)

E5: Metronome ON/OFF

About MIDI

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 65

Transferring data between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and a computer

The PSR-E313/YPT-310 includes 102 preset Songs and 106 Styles, but

you can load other Songs and Styles from your computer and use them in

the same way as the preset Songs and Styles as long as the loaded Song is

SMF format 0* or the loaded Style is SFF (Style File Format).

Loaded Song data will be stored to Song numbers beginning with 108 and

one of the loaded style/s can be registered as the 107th style.

In order to perform the operations described in this section you will need to

use a computer connected to the Internet to download the free Musicsoft

Downloader application.

* The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible

sequence formats used for storing sequence data. Most commercially available MIDI

sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0.

You can download the “Musicsoft Downloader” application from the fol-

lowing website. Make sure that your computer has an Internet connection.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

● The minimum computer requirements for Musicsoft

Downloader operation are as follows:

• OS : Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP Home Edition/

XP Professional

• CPU : 233 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron®

processor family (500 MHz or more is recommended)

• Memory : 64 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended)

• Hard Disk : at least 128 MB of free space (at least 512 MB of free

space is recommended)

• Display : 800 x 600 HighColor (16-bit)

• Other : Microsoft® Internet Explorer®5.5 or higher

Installing Musicsoft Downloader

• Visit the Yamaha website for

more information on the lat-

est version of Musicsoft

Downloader (version 5.4.0

or higher) and how to install

it.

NOTE

About MIDI

66 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

After installing the Musicsoft Downloader application on your computer,

connect the PSR-E313/YPT-310 as described below.

A Yamaha UX16 or similar USB-MIDI interface (sold separately) will be

necessary for MIDI connection between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and a

USB-equipped computer.

Make sure to purchase a Yamaha UX16 or a quality USB-MIDI interface at

a musical instrument store, computer store or electrical appliance store.

If you use the UX16 interface, install the driver supplied with the interface

on your computer.

Connecting a personal computer

A USB-MIDI interface

(such as the Yamaha UX16)

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

USB

PSR-E313/

YPT-310

About MIDI

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 67

You can transmit Song ﬁles and Style Files from your com-

puter to the Flash Memory on your PSR-E313/YPT-310. For

details about how to transmit Song ﬁle and Style File using

the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online

help topic “Transferring Data Between the Computer and

Instrument (for unprotected data)” of the Musicsoft

Downloader.

● Data that can be loaded to the PSR-E313/YPT-

310 from a computer

• Songs : 99 Songs max (Song numbers 108–)

• Data : 373 kilobytes

• Data Format : SMF Format 0

• File : 07PK3.BUP (Backup ﬁle)

: ***.mid (MIDI Song)

: ***.sty (Style File)

Transferring a ﬁle from a computer

• The Musicsoft Downloader application may not

be able to access the instrument in the follow-

ing cases:

• During Style playback

• During Song playback

NOTE

• Use the power adaptor when transferring

data. The data can be corrupted if the bat-

teries fail during the transfer.

•Never turn the power off and never plug/

unplug the AC power adaptor during data

transmission. Not only will the data fail to

be transferred and saved, but operation of

the ﬂash memory may become unstable

and its contents may disappear completely

when the power is turned on or off.

CAUTION

• Close the window to exit from the Musicsoft

Downloader and re-enable control of the instru-

ment.

NOTE

Destination

About MIDI

68 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

You can transfer backup data (page 31) to a computer as a

“backup ﬁle” by using Musicsoft Downloader. For details

about how to transmit backup ﬁles using the Musicsoft

Downloader application, refer to the Online help topic

“Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument

(for unprotected data)” of the Musicsoft Downloader.

● Data that can be transferred to a computer from the PSR-E313/YPT-310

• Backup ﬁle (07PK3.BUP: backup data containing ﬁve User Songs)

• Songs transferred from a computer

Transferring a backup ﬁle from the PSR-E313/YPT-310 to a computer

● Erasing Transferred Song Data from the PSR-E313/YPT-310 Memory

To erase all Songs transferred from the computer, use “ﬂash clear” function on page 31.

To erase speciﬁc Songs transferred from the computer, use the Delete function on Musicsoft Downloader.

● Using Transferred Songs for Lessons

In order to use Songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for lessons it is necessary to specify which

channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. Refer to the “Lesson Track (R)” or “Lesson

Track (L)” in the Function Setting List on page 60. The procedure for setting the “guide track” is as follows:

Select a transferred Song you want to use for lessons. Press

the

[FUNCTION] button a number of times until

the “R-Part” or “L-Part” appears in the display, and then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the

channel you want to play back as the speciﬁed right- or left-hand part.

We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.

• Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from

the PSR-E313/YPT-310.

• Do not rename the backup ﬁle on the com-

puter. If you do so, it will not be recognized

when transferred to the instrument.

NOTE

• The backup data, including the ﬁve User

Songs is transmitted/received as a single

ﬁle. As a result, all backup data (including

the ﬁve Songs) will be overwritten every

time you transmit or receive. Keep this in

mind when transferring data.

CAUTION

Click here to display the backup ﬁle

at the bottom of the window.

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 69

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

When the instrument is turned on or off, a

popping sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical

power.

When using a mobile phone, noise is pro-

duced.

Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce

interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further

away from the instrument.

There is no sound even when the keyboard is

played or when a Song or Style is being

played back.

Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the

rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound

is output.

Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 62.)

Playing keys in the right hand area of the

keyboard does not produce any sound.

When using the Dictionary function (page 57), the keys in the right hand

area are used only for entering the chord root and type.

• The volume is too soft.

• The sound quality is poor.

• The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not

play.

• The recorded data of the Song, etc. does

not play correctly.

• The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and

all panel settings are reset.

The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely

new ones, or use the optional AC adaptor.

The Style or Song does not play back when

the [START/STOP] button is pressed.

Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF;

refer to “External Clock Settings” on page 63.

The Style does not sound properly.

Make sure that the Style Volume (page 53) is set to an appropriate level.

Is the Split Point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing?

Set the Split Point at an appropriate key (page 46).

Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing

press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.

No rhythm accompaniment plays when the

[START/STOP] button is pressed after

selecting Style number 098–106 (Pianist).

This is not a malfunction. Style number 098–106 (Pianist) have no

rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin playing

when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if

auto accompaniment is turned on.

Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the

sound seems to be cut off.

The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual

voice or Split voice is being used and a style or Song is playing back at

the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the

accompaniment or Song.

The footswitch (for sustain) seems to pro-

duce the opposite effect. For example, press-

ing the footswitch cuts off the sound and

releasing it sustains the sounds.

The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch

plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the

power.

The sound of the voice changes from note to

note.

This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple record-

ings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus,

the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.

The ACMP ON indicator does not appear

when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.

Always press the [STYLE] button ﬁrst when you are going to use any

style-related function.

The harmony doesn’t sound.

The method of sounding the harmony effect (01–26) differs depending

on the selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on

and play it by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the

keyboard, then play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony

effect. For Types 06–26, turning the Auto Accompaniment on or off has

no effect. However, it is necessary to play two notes simultaneously for

Types 06–12.

The part indications, such as Right, Left and

Both Hands, do not appear—even when

pressing the [R] or [L] buttons for the Lesson.

Make sure that you are not pressing the [R] or [L] buttons while the Song

is playing. If you press one of the part buttons while playing the Song

and before starting the Lesson, these buttons serve to mute the corre-

sponding Song tracks. Stop the Song ﬁrst, then select the desired part

and start the Lesson.

70 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Voice List

■ Maximum Polyphony • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that

it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of

what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of

the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total

number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is corre-

spondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song

functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played

notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last

note priority).

● Panel Voice List

• The Voice List includes MIDI program

change numbers for each voice. Use these

program change numbers when playing the

instrument via MIDI from an external device.

•Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate

to MIDI Program Change Numbers 000 to

127. That is, Program Numbers and Program

Change Numbers differ by a value of 1.

Remember to take this into consideration.

• Some voices may sound continuously or

have a long decay after the notes have been

released while the sustain pedal (footswitch)

is held.

NOTE

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PIANO

001 0 112 1 Grand Piano

002 0 112 2 Bright Piano

003 0 112 7 Harpsichord

004 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano

005 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano

006 0 113 3 CP 80

E.PIANO

007 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano

008 0 113 6 Hyper Tines

009 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano

010 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano

011 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano

012 0 112 8 Clavi

ORGAN

013 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1

014 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2

015 0 112 19 Rock Organ

016 0 114 19 Purple Organ

017 0 112 18 Click Organ

018 0 116 17 Bright Organ

019 0 127 19 Theater Organ

020 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ

021 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ

022 0 113 20 Chapel Organ

023 0 112 20 Church Organ

024 0 112 21 Reed Organ

ACCORDION

025 0 112 22 Musette Accordion

026 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion

027 0 113 24 Bandoneon

028 0 112 23 Harmonica

GUITAR

029 0 112 25 Classical Guitar

030 0 112 26 Folk Guitar

031 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar

032 0 117 28 60’s Clean Guitar

033 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar

034 0 112 28 Clean Guitar

035 0 113 27 Octave Guitar

036 0 112 29 Muted Guitar

037 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar

038 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar

BASS

039 0 112 34 Finger Bass

040 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass

041 0 112 35 Pick Bass

042 0 112 36 Fretless Bass

043 0 112 37 Slap Bass

044 0 112 39 Synth Bass

045 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass

046 0 113 40 Dance Bass

STRINGS

047 0 112 49 String Ensemble

048 0 112 50 Chamber Strings

049 0 113 50 Slow Strings

050 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings

051 0 112 51 Synth Strings

052 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings

053 0 112 41 Violin

054 0 112 43 Cello

055 0 112 44 Contrabass

056 0 112 47 Harp

057 0 112 106 Banjo

058 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit

CHOIR

059 0 112 53 Choir

060 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble

061 0 112 55 Air Choir

062 0 112 54 Vox Humana

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 71

SAXOPHONE

063 0 112 67 Tenor Sax

064 0 112 66 Alto Sax

065 0 112 65 Soprano Sax

066 0 112 68 Baritone Sax

067 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax

068 0 112 72 Clarinet

069 0 112 69 Oboe

070 0 112 70 English Horn

071 0 112 71 Bassoon

TRUMPET

072 0 112 57 Trumpet

073 0 112 58 Trombone

074 0 113 58 Trombone Section

075 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet

076 0 112 61 French Horn

077 0 112 59 Tuba

BRASS

078 0 112 62 Brass Section

079 0 113 62 Big Band Brass

080 0 113 63 80’s Brass

081 0 119 62 Mellow Horns

082 0 114 63 Techno Brass

083 0 112 63 Synth Brass

FLUTE

084 0 112 74 Flute

085 0 112 73 Piccolo

086 0 112 76 Pan Flute

087 0 112 75 Recorder

088 0 112 80 Ocarina

SYNTH

089 0 112 81 Square Lead

090 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead

091 0 115 82 Analogon

092 0 119 82 Fargo

093 0 112 99 Star Dust

094 0 112 86 Voice Lead

095 0 112 101 Brightness

096 0 112 92 Xenon Pad

097 0 112 95 Equinox

098 0 112 89 Fantasia

099 0 113 90 Dark Moon

100 0 113 101 Bell Pad

PERCUSSION

101 0 112 12 Vibraphone

102 0 112 13 Marimba

103 0 112 14 Xylophone

104 0 112 115 Steel Drums

105 0 112 9 Celesta

106 0 112 11 Music Box

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

107 0 112 15 Tubular Bells

108 0 112 48 Timpani

DRUM KITS

109 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1

110 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2

111 127 0 9 Room Kit

112 127 0 17 Rock Kit

113 127 0 25 Electronic Kit

114 127 0 26 Analog Kit

115 127 0 113 Dance Kit

116 127 0 33 Jazz Kit

117 127 0 41 Brush Kit

118 127 0 49 Symphony Kit

119 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1

120 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2

121 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

72 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

● XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PIANO

122 0 0 1 Grand Piano

123 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP

124 0 40 1 Piano Strings

125 0 41 1 Dream

126 0 0 2 Bright Piano

127 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP

128 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano

129 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP

130 0 32 3 Detuned CP80

131 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano

132 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP

133 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1

134 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP

135 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1

136 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2

137 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP

*138 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2

139 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano

140 0 0 7 Harpsichord

141 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP

142 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2

143 0 0 8 Clavi

144 0 1 8 Clavi KSP

CHROMATIC

145 0 0 9 Celesta

146 0 0 10 Glockenspiel

147 0 0 11 Music Box

148 0 64 11 Orgel

149 0 0 12 Vibraphone

150 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP

151 0 0 13 Marimba

152 0 1 13 Marimba KSP

153 0 64 13 Sine Marimba

154 0 97 13 Balimba

155 0 98 13 Log Drums

156 0 0 14 Xylophone

157 0 0 15 Tubular Bells

158 0 96 15 Church Bells

159 0 97 15 Carillon

160 0 0 16 Dulcimer

161 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2

162 0 96 16 Cimbalom

163 0 97 16 Santur

ORGAN

164 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ

165 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ

166 0 33 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 1

167 0 34 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 2

168 0 35 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 1

169 0 37 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 3

170 0 40 17 16+2'2/3

171 0 64 17 Organ Bass

172 0 65 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 2

173 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ

174 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2

175 0 0 18 Percussive Organ

176 0 24 18 70’s Percussive Organ

177 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ

178 0 33 18 Light Organ

179 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2

180 0 0 19 Rock Organ

181 0 64 19 Rotary Organ

182 0 65 19 Slow Rotary

183 0 66 19 Fast Rotary

184 0 0 20 Church Organ

185 0 32 20 Church Organ 3

186 0 35 20 Church Organ 2

187 0 40 20 Notre Dame

188 0 64 20 Organ Flute

189 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute

190 0 0 21 Reed Organ

191 0 40 21 Puff Organ

192 0 0 22 Accordion

193 0 0 23 Harmonica

194 0 32 23 Harmonica 2

195 0 0 24 Tango Accordion

196 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2

GUITAR

197 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar

198 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics

199 0 96 25 Ukulele

200 0 0 26 Steel Guitar

201 0 35 26 12-string Guitar

202 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar

203 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound

204 0 96 26 Mandolin

205 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar

206 0 32 27 Jazz Amp

207 0 0 28 Clean Guitar

208 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar

209 0 0 29 Muted Guitar

210 0 40 29 Funk Guitar

211 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar

212 0 45 29 Jazz Man

213 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar

214 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 73

215 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar

216 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar

217 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2

218 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics

219 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback

220 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2

BASS

221 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass

222 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm

223 0 45 33 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass

224 0 0 34 Finger Bass

225 0 18 34 Finger Dark

226 0 40 34 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar

227 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass

228 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2

229 0 65 34 Modulated Bass

230 0 0 35 Pick Bass

231 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass

232 0 0 36 Fretless Bass

233 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2

234 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3

235 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4

236 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1

237 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass

238 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2

239 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap

240 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1

241 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass

242 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2

243 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass

244 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass

245 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass

246 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark

*247 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass

248 0 41 40 DX Bass

STRINGS

249 0 0 41 Violin

250 0 8 41 Slow Violin

251 0 0 42 Viola

252 0 0 43 Cello

253 0 0 44 Contrabass

254 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings

255 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings

256 0 40 45 Suspense Strings

257 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings

258 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp

259 0 40 47 Yang Chin

260 0 0 48 Timpani

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

ENSEMBLE

261 0 0 49 Strings 1

262 0 3 49 Stereo Strings

263 0 8 49 Slow Strings

264 0 35 49 60’s Strings

265 0 40 49 Orchestra

266 0 41 49 Orchestra 2

267 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra

268 0 45 49 Velocity Strings

269 0 0 50 Strings 2

270 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings

271 0 8 50 Legato Strings

272 0 40 50 Warm Strings

273 0 41 50 Kingdom

274 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1

275 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2

276 0 0 53 Choir Aahs

277 0 3 53 Stereo Choir

278 0 32 53 Mellow Choir

279 0 40 53 Choir Strings

280 0 0 54 Voice Oohs

281 0 0 55 Synth Voice

282 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2

283 0 41 55 Choral

284 0 64 55 Analog Voice

285 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit

286 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2

287 0 64 56 Impact

BRASS

288 0 0 57 Trumpet

289 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet

290 0 0 58 Trombone

291 0 18 58 Trombone 2

292 0 0 59 Tuba

293 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet

294 0 0 61 French Horn

295 0 6 61 French Horn Solo

296 0 32 61 French Horn 2

297 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra

298 0 0 62 Brass Section

299 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section

300 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1

301 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass

302 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2

303 0 18 64 Soft Brass

304 0 41 64 Choir Brass

REED

305 0 0 65 Soprano Sax

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

74 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

306 0 0 66 Alto Sax

307 0 40 66 Sax Section

308 0 0 67 Tenor Sax

309 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax

310 0 0 68 Baritone Sax

311 0 0 69 Oboe

312 0 0 70 English Horn

313 0 0 71 Bassoon

314 0 0 72 Clarinet

PIPE

315 0 0 73 Piccolo

316 0 0 74 Flute

317 0 0 75 Recorder

318 0 0 76 Pan Flute

319 0 0 77 Blown Bottle

320 0 0 78 Shakuhachi

321 0 0 79 Whistle

322 0 0 80 Ocarina

SYNTH LEAD

323 0 0 81 Square Lead

324 0 6 81 Square Lead 2

325 0 8 81 LM Square

326 0 18 81 Hollow

327 0 19 81 Shroud

328 0 64 81 Mellow

329 0 65 81 Solo Sine

330 0 66 81 Sine Lead

331 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead

332 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2

333 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth

334 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth

335 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth

336 0 20 82 Big Lead

337 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog

338 0 0 83 Calliope Lead

339 0 65 83 Pure Lead

340 0 0 84 Chiff Lead

341 0 0 85 Charang Lead

342 0 64 85 Distorted Lead

343 0 0 86 Voice Lead

344 0 0 87 Fifths Lead

345 0 35 87 Big Five

346 0 0 88 Bass & Lead

347 0 16 88 Big & Low

348 0 64 88 Fat & Perky

349 0 65 88 Soft Whirl

SYNTH PAD

350 0 0 89 New Age Pad

351 0 64 89 Fantasy

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

352 0 0 90 Warm Pad

353 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad

354 0 0 92 Choir Pad

355 0 66 92 Itopia

356 0 0 93 Bowed Pad

357 0 0 94 Metallic Pad

358 0 0 95 Halo Pad

359 0 0 96 Sweep Pad

SYNTH EFFECTS

360 0 0 97 Rain

361 0 65 97 African Wind

362 0 66 97 Carib

363 0 0 98 Sound Track

364 0 27 98 Prologue

365 0 0 99 Crystal

366 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp

367 0 14 99 Popcorn

368 0 18 99 Tiny Bells

369 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel

370 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes

371 0 41 99 Clear Bells

372 0 42 99 Chorus Bells

373 0 65 99 Soft Crystal

374 0 70 99 Air Bells

375 0 71 99 Bell Harp

376 0 72 99 Gamelimba

377 0 0 100 Atmosphere

378 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere

379 0 19 100 Hollow Release

380 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano

381 0 64 100 Nylon Harp

382 0 65 100 Harp Vox

383 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad

384 0 0 101 Brightness

385 0 0 102 Goblins

386 0 64 102 Goblins Synth

387 0 65 102 Creeper

388 0 67 102 Ritual

389 0 68 102 To Heaven

390 0 70 102 Night

391 0 71 102 Glisten

392 0 96 102 Bell Choir

393 0 0 103 Echoes

394 0 0 104 Sci-Fi

WORLD

395 0 0 105 Sitar

396 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar

397 0 35 105 Sitar 2

398 0 97 105 Tamboura

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 75

The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice.

399 0 0 106 Banjo

400 0 28 106 Muted Banjo

401 0 96 106 Rabab

402 0 97 106 Gopichant

403 0 98 106 Oud

404 0 0 107 Shamisen

405 0 0 108 Koto

406 0 96 108 Taisho-kin

407 0 97 108 Kanoon

408 0 0 109 Kalimba

409 0 0 110 Bagpipe

410 0 0 111 Fiddle

411 0 0 112 Shanai

PERCUSSIVE

412 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell

413 0 96 113 Bonang

414 0 97 113 Altair

415 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs

416 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs

417 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal

418 0 0 114 Agogo

419 0 0 115 Steel Drums

420 0 97 115 Glass Percussion

421 0 98 115 Thai Bells

422 0 0 116 Woodblock

423 0 96 116 Castanets

424 0 0 117 Taiko Drum

425 0 96 117 Gran Cassa

426 0 0 118 Melodic Tom

427 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2

428 0 65 118 Real Tom

429 0 66 118 Rock Tom

430 0 0 119 Synth Drum

431 0 64 119 Analog Tom

432 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion

433 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal

SOUND EFFECTS

434 0 0 121 Fret Noise

435 0 0 122 Breath Noise

436 0 0 123 Seashore

437 0 0 124 Bird Tweet

438 0 0 125 Telephone Ring

439 0 0 126 Helicopter

440 0 0 127 Applause

441 0 0 128 Gunshot

442 64 0 1 Cutting Noise

443 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2

444 64 0 4 String Slap

445 64 0 17 Flute Key Click

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

446 64 0 33 Shower

447 64 0 34 Thunder

448 64 0 35 Wind

449 64 0 36 Stream

450 64 0 37 Bubble

451 64 0 38 Feed

452 64 0 49 Dog

453 64 0 50 Horse

454 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2

455 64 0 56 Maou

456 64 0 65 Phone Call

457 64 0 66 Door Squeak

458 64 0 67 Door Slam

459 64 0 68 Scratch Cut

460 64 0 69 Scratch Split

461 64 0 70 Wind Chime

462 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2

463 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition

464 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal

465 64 0 83 Car Passing

466 64 0 84 Car Crash

467 64 0 85 Siren

468 64 0 86 Train

469 64 0 87 Jet Plane

470 64 0 88 Starship

471 64 0 89 Burst

472 64 0 90 Roller Coaster

473 64 0 91 Submarine

474 64 0 97 Laugh

475 64 0 98 Scream

476 64 0 99 Punch

477 64 0 100 Heartbeat

478 64 0 101 Footsteps

479 64 0 113 Machine Gun

480 64 0 114 Laser Gun

481 64 0 115 Explosion

482 64 0 116 Firework

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

76 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Drum Kit List

•“ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.

• Each percussion voice uses one note.

• The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For

example, in “109: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note#

24/Note C0).

•Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.

•Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They

are designed to be played alternately with each other.)

Voice No.

109 110 111 112 113

MSB(0–127) / LSB(0–127) / PC(1–128)

127/0/1 127/0/2 127/0/9 127/0/17 127/0/25

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

Group

Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch Push

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch Pull

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft Snare H Soft 2 SD Rock H Snare L

44 G# 132G# 0Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum H

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 2

47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum H BD Rock

48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Bass Drum 2 BD Rock BD Gate

49 C# 237C# 1Side Stick

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock L SD Rock L

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Snare H Hard 2 SD Room H SD Rock Rim SD Rock H

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 E Tom 1

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 E Tom 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 5

61 C# 349C# 2Crash Cymbal 1

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6

63 D# 351D# 2Ride Cymbal 1

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4Claves

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch Push

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch Pull

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Drum Kit List

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 77

Voice No.

109 114 115 116 117

MSB(0–127) / LSB(0–127) / PC(1–128)

127/0/1 127/0/26 127/0/28 127/0/33 127/0/41

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

Group

Standard Kit 1 Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch Push

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch Pull

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft SD Rock H AnSD Snappy SD Jazz H Light Brush Slap L

44 G# 132G# 0Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum H AnBD Dance-1

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot AnSD OpenRim

47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard BD Analog L AnBD Dance-2

48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum BD Analog H AnBD Dance-3 BD Jazz BD Jazz

49 C# 237C# 1Side Stick Analog Side Stick Analog Side Stick

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Analog Snare 1 AnSD Q SD Jazz L Brush Slap

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Analog Snare 2 AnSD Ana+Acoustic SD Jazz M Brush Tap

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Analog Tom 1 Analog Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tom 1

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed Analog HH Closed 1 Analog HH Closed 3

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Analog Tom 2 Analog Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal Analog HH Closed 2 Analog HH Closed 4

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Analog Tom 3 Analog Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Analog HH Open Analog HH Open 2

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Analog Tom 5 Analog Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 5

61 C# 349C# 2Crash Cymbal 1 Analog Cymbal Analog Cymbal

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Analog Tom 6 Analog Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6

63 D# 351D# 2Ride Cymbal 1

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Analog Cowbell Analog Cowbell

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H Analog Conga H

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Analog Conga M Analog Conga M

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Analog Conga L Analog Conga L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Analog Maracas Analog Maracas

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4Claves Analog Claves Analog Claves

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch Push Scratch Push

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch Pull Scratch Pull

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Drum Kit List

78 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Voice No.

109 118 119 120 121

MSB(0–127) / LSB(0–127) / PC(1–128)

127/0/1 127/0/49 126/0/1 126/0/2 126/0/113

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

Group

Standard Kit 1 Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1

SFX Kit 2 Sound Effect Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch Push

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch Pull

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

Drum Loop

37 C# 125C# 0Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft

44 G# 132G# 0Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum L

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot

47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard Gran Cassa

48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Phone Call Heartbeat

49 C# 237C# 1Side Stick Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Footsteps

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Marching Sn M Door Slam Door Squeak

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap String Slap Scratch Cut Door Slam

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Marching Sn H Scratch Applause

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Jazz Tom 1 Wind Chime Camera

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed Telephone Ring 2 Horn

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Jazz Tom 2 Hiccup

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal Cuckoo Clock

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Jazz Tom 3 Stream

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Frog

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Jazz Tom 4 Rooster

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Jazz Tom 5 Dog

61 C# 349C# 2Crash Cymbal 1 Hand Cym. L Cat

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Jazz Tom 6 Owl

63 D# 351D# 2Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cym.Short L Horse Gallop

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Horse Neigh

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal Cow

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Car Passing Lion

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Car Crash Scratch

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Siren Yo!

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cym. H Train Go!

70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap Jet Plane Get up!

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cym.Short H Starship Whoow!

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H

Burst

Huuaah!

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

Roller Coaster

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Submarine

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Shower Laugh

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa Thunder Scream

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas

Wind Punch

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H

Stream Heartbeat

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L Bubble Footsteps

Uh!+Hit

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short Feed

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4Claves

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Dog Machine Gun

97 C# 685C# 5 Horse Laser Gun

98 D 6 86 D 5 Bird Tweet 2 Explosion

99 D# 687D# 5 Firework

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5 Maou

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 79

Style List

Style

No.

Style Name

8 Beat

001 8BeatModern

002 60’sGtrPop

003 8BeatAdria

004 60’s8Beat

005 8Beat

006 OffBeat

007 60’sRock

008 HardRock

009 RockShuffle

010 8BeatRock

16 Beat

011 16Beat

012 PopShuffle

013 GuitarPop

014 16BtUptempo

015 KoolShuffle

016 HipHopLight

Ballad

017 PianoBallad

018 LoveSong

019 6/8ModernEP

020 6/8SlowRock

021 OrganBallad

022 PopBallad

023 16BeatBallad

Dance

024 EuroTrance

025 Ibiza

026 SwingHouse

027 Clubdance

028 ClubLatin

029 Garage1

030 Garage2

031 TechnoParty

032 UKPop

033 HipHopGroove

034 HipShuffle

035 HipHopPop

Disco

036 70’sDisco

037 LatinDisco

038 SaturdayNight

039 DiscoHands

Swing & Jazz

040 BigBandFast

041 BigBandBallad

042 JazzClub

043 Swing1

044 Swing2

045 Five/Four

046 Dixieland

047 Ragtime

R & B

048 Soul

049 DetroitPop

050 6/8Soul

051 CrocoTwist

052 Rock&Roll

053 ComboBoogie

054 6/8Blues

Country

055 CountryPop

056 CountrySwing

057 Country2/4

058 Bluegrass

Latin

059 BrazilianSamba

060 BossaNova

061 Tijuana

062 DiscoLatin

063 Mambo

064 Salsa

065 Beguine

066 Reggae

Ballroom

067 VienneseWaltz

068 EnglishWaltz

069 Slowfox

070 Foxtrot

071 Quickstep

072 Tango

073 Pasodoble

074 Samba

075 ChaChaCha

076 Rumba

077 Jive

Style

No.

Style Name

Traditional

078 USMarch

079 6/8March

080 GermanMarch

081 PolkaPop

082 OberPolka

083 Tarantella

084 Showtune

085 ChristmasSwing

086 ChristmasWaltz

087 ScottishReel

Waltz

088 SwingWaltz

089 JazzWaltz

090 CountryWaltz

091 OberWalzer

092 Musette

Children

093 Learning2/4

094 Learning4/4

095 Learning6/8

096 Fun 3/4

097 Fun 4/4

Pianist

098 Stride

099 PianoSwing

100 PianoBoogie

101 Arpeggio

102 Habanera

103 SlowRock

104 8BeatPianoBallad

105 6/8PianoMarch

106 PianoWaltz

Style

No.

Style Name

80 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Music Database List

MDB

No.

MDB Name

POP

1 AlvFever

2 DayPdise

3 GoMyWay

4 HowDeep!

5 HurryLuv

6 Imagine

7 JustCall

8 SultanSw

9 WhitePle

10 YesterPf

ROCK

11 JumpRock

12 PickUpPc

13 RdRiverR

14 SatsfyGt

15 Sheriff

16 SmokeWtr

17 TwistAgn

18 VenusPop

DANCE

19 2 of Us

20 B Leave

21 Back St

22 Crockett

23 FunkyTwn

24 KillSoft

25 Nine PM

26 SingBack

27 StrandD

BALLAD

28 AdelineB

29 CatMemry

30 ElvGhett

31 Feeling

32 Mn Rivr

33 OnMyMnd

34 OverRbow

35 ReleseMe

36 SavingLv

37 SmokyEye

38 WhisprSx

R & B

39 AmazingG

40 BoogiePf

41 Clock Rk

42 CU later

43 HappyDay

44 RisingSn

45 ShookUp

46 TeddyBer

SWING & JAZZ

47 ChooChoo

48 HighMoon

49 InMood

50 MistySax

51 MoonLit

52 New York

53 SaintMch

54 ShearJz

55 TstHoney

56 USPatrol

EASY LISTENING

57 Close2U

58 Entrtain

59 LuvStory

60 MyPrince

61 PupetStr

62 Raindrop

63 R'ticGtr

64 SingRain

65 SmallWld

66 SpkSoft

67 StrangeN

68 TimeGoes

69 WhteXmas

70 WishStar

71 WondrWld

LATIN

72 BambaLa

73 BeHappy!

74 CopaLola

75 DayNight

76 Ipanema

MDB

No.

MDB Name

77 MuchoTrp

78 Sunshine

79 Tico Org

80 TrbWave

COUNTRY

81 BoxerFlt

82 CntryRds

83 Jambala

84 TopWorld

85 YlwRose

BALLROOM

86 BrazilBr

87 CherryTp

88 DanubeWv

89 TangoAc

90 Tea4Two

TRADITIONAL

91 CampRace

92 CielPari

93 GrndClok

94 JinglBel

95 MickMrch

96 Showbiz

97 StarMrch

98 WashPost

99 XmasWalz

100 YankDood

MDB

No.

MDB Name

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 81

Effect Type List

● Harmony Types

● Reverb Types

● Chorus Types

No. Harmony Type Description

01 Duet

If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the

Split Point while playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompa-

niment on. One, two or three notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you

play. When playing back a Song that includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever

keys are played.

02 Trio

03 Block

04 Country

05 Octave

06 Trill 1/4 note

If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) con-

tinuously.

07 Trill 1/6 note

08 Trill 1/8 note

09 Trill 1/12 note

10 Trill 1/16 note

11 Trill 1/24 note

12 Trill 1/32 note

13 Tremolo 1/4 note

If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously.

(The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.)

14 Tremolo 1/6 note

15 Tremolo 1/8 note

16 Tremolo 1/12 note

17 Tremolo 1/16 note

18 Tremolo 1/24 note

19 Tremolo 1/32 note

20 Echo 1/4 note

If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played.

(The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.)

21 Echo 1/6 note

22 Echo 1/8 note

23 Echo 1/12 note

24 Echo 1/16 note

25 Echo 1/24 note

26 Echo 1/32 note

No. Reverb Type Description

01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb.

04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb.

06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments.

08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb.

10 Off No effect.

No. Chorus Type Description

1–2 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

3–4 Flanger 1–2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound.

5 Off No effect.

82 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Implementation Chart

YAMAHA [ Portable Keyboard ] Date:21-Aug-2006

Model PSR-E313/YPT-310 MIDI Implementation Chart Version:1.0

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Function...

Basic Default 1 - 16 1 - 16

Channel Changed x x

Default 3 3

Mode Messages x x

Altered ************** x

Note 0 - 127 0 - 127

Number : True voice ************** 0 - 127

Velocity Note ON o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=1-127

Note OFF x x

After Key's x x

Touch Ch's x x

Pitch Bend x o

0,32 o o Bank Select

1x *1 o Modulation wheel

6x *1 o Data Entry(MSB)

38 x *1 x Data Entry(LSB)

7,10 o o

Control 11 x *1 o Expression

64 o o Sustain

Change 71,73,74 x *1 o

MIDI Implementation Chart

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 83

Prog o 0 - 127 o 0 - 127

Change : True # **************

System Exclusive o o

: Song Pos. x x

Common : Song Sel. x x

: Tune x x

System : Clock o o

Real Time: Commands o o

:All Sound OFF x o(120,126,127)

Aux :Reset All Cntrls x o(121)

:Local ON/OFF x o(122)

Mes- :All Notes OFF x o(123-125)

sages:Active Sense o o

:Reset x x

72 o o Release Time

84 x *1 o Portamento Cntrl

91,93 o o Effect 1,3 Depth

96,97 x o RPN Inc,Dec

100,101 x o RPN LSB,MSB

*1 Refer to #2 on page 84.

Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO o : Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO x : No

84 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

NOTE:

1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily

functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator,

and incoming data does not affect the panel voices or

panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed

below do affect the panel voices, auto accompaniment,

and songs.

• MIDI Master Tuning

• System exclusive messages for changing the

Reverb Type and Chorus Type.

2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be

transmitted from the instrument itself. However, they

may be transmitted when playing the accompaniment,

song or using the Harmony effect.

3 Exclusive

<GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H

• This message automatically restores all default set-

tings for the instrument, with the exception of MIDI

Master Tuning.

<MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll,

mm, F7H

• This message allows the volume of all channels to

be changed simultaneously (Universal System

Exclusive).

• The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume.

(Values for “ll” are ignored.)

<MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H,

00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H

• This message simultaneously changes the tuning

value of all channels.

• The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master

Tuning.

• The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H,

respectively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc.”

<Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H,

mmH, llH, F7H

• mm : Reverb Type MSB

• ll : Reverb Type LSB

Refer to the Effect Map (page 84) for details.

<Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H,

mmH, llH, F7H

• mm : Chorus Type MSB

• ll : Chorus Type LSB

Refer to the Effect Map (page 84) for details.

4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message

is transmitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an

FCH message is transmitted. When the clock is set to

External, both FAH (accompaniment start) and FCH

(accompaniment stop) are recognized.

5 Local ON/OFF

<Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F

<Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00

Value for “n” is ignored.

■ Effect map • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

* When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to

no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type

(coming the closest to the speciﬁed value) is automati-

cally set.

* The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type

names correspond to the number indicated in the dis-

play.

● REVERB

● CHORUS

TYPE

MSB

TYPE LSB

01 2 8 1617 18 19 20

0 No Effect

1 (01)Hall1 (02)Hall2 (03)Hall3

2 Room (04)Room1 (05)Room2

3 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2

4 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2

5...127 No Effect

TYPE

MSB

TYPE LSB

01 2 8 1617 18 19 20

0...63 No Effect

64 Thru

65 Chorus (2)Chorus2

66 Celeste (1)Chorus1

67 Flanger (3)Flanger1 (4)Flanger2

68...127 No Effect

MIDI Data Format

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 85

Speciﬁcations

Keyboards

• 61 standard-size keys (C1–C6), with Touch Response

Display

• LCD display (backlit)

Setup

•STANDBY/ON

• MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX

Panel Controls

• [L]/[REC TRACK 2], [R]/[REC TRACK 1], [LISTEN & LEARN],

[TIMING], [WAITING], [A-B REPEAT]/[ACMP ON/OFF],

[REW]/[INTRO/ENDING/rit.], [FF]/[[MAIN/AUTO FILL],

[TEMPO/TAP], [REC], [PAUSE]/[SYNC START], [START/STOP],

[SONG], [STYLE], [VOICE], [FUNCTION], [PORTABLE

GRAND], [MUSIC DATABASE], [REVERB ON/OFF], [DEMO],

[METRONOME ON/OFF], [SPLIT ON/OFF], [DUAL ON/OFF],

[HARMONY ON/OFF], [TOUCH ON/OFF],

number buttons [0]–[9], [+/ YES], [-/ NO]

Voice

• 108 panel voices + 12 drum kits + 1 sound effect kit +

359 XGlite voices + 2 XGlite optional voices

•Polyphony: 32

•DUAL

• SPLIT

Style

• 106 preset Styles + ﬂash memory

• Style Control:

ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP,

INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL

• Fingering: Multi ﬁngering

• Style Volume

• Style Register

Education Feature

• Chord Dictionary

• Lesson 1–3

Function

• Style Volume, Song Volume, Transpose, Tuning, Split Point,

Touch Sensitivity, Style Register, Main voice (Volume, Octave,

Chorus Send Level), Dual voice (Voice, Volume, Octave, Chorus

Send Level), Split voice (Voice, Volume, Octave, Chorus Send

Level), Reverb Type, Reverb level, Chorus Type, Panel Sustain,

Harmony Type, Harmony Volume, PC mode (PC1/PC2/Off),

Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Setup Send, Time Signature

(Numerator, Denominator), Metronome Volume, Lesson Track

(R), Lesson Track (L),

Demo Cancel

Effects

•Reverb: 9 types

• Chorus: 4 types

• Harmony: 26 types

Song

• 102 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Flash Memory

• Song Clear

• Song Volume

Music Database

• 100

Recording

• Song

User Song: 5 Songs

Recording Tracks: 1, 2

MIDI

• Local On/Off

• Initial Setup Send

• External Clock

• PC mode

Auxiliary jacks

• PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, MIDI IN/OUT, SUSTAIN

Ampliﬁer

• 2.5W + 2.5W

Speakers

• 12cm x 2

Power Consumption

• 10W (When using PA-130 power adaptor)

Power Supply

• Adaptor: Yamaha PA-130 or an equivalent

• Batteries: Six “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries

Dimensions (W x D x H)

• 945 x 370 x 128 mm

(37-1/4" x 14-5/8" x 5-1/16")

Weight

• 4.9kg (10 lbs. 13 oz.) (not including batteries)

Supplied Accessories

• Music Rest

• Owner’s Manual

* Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for

information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to

change or modify products or speciﬁcations at any time without

prior notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options may not

be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha

dealer.

Optional Accessories

•AC Power Adaptor: Yamaha PA-130 or an equivalent

• USB-MIDI Interface: UX16

•Footswitch: FC4/FC5

•Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L

• Headphones: HPE-150/HPE-30

86 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Index

A-B REPEAT button ................................................. 41

ACMP ON/OFF button .............................................. 21

DEMO button ............................................................. 19

DUAL ON/OFF button .............................................. 13

FF button .................................................................... 19

FUNCTION button .............................................. 33, 59

HARMONY ON/OFF button .................................... 42

INTRO/ENDING/rit. Button ..................................... 51

L button ...................................................................... 36

LISTEN & LEARN button ........................................ 36

MAIN/AUTO FILL button ........................................ 51

MASTER VOLUME control ................................. 9, 32

METRONOME ON/OFF button ............................... 24

number buttons 0–9, +/YES, -/NO ............................ 33

PAUSE button ............................................................ 19

PORTABLE GRAND button .................................... 15

R button ...................................................................... 36

REC button ................................................................. 27

REC TRACK 1 button ............................................... 29

REC TRACK 2 button ............................................... 29

REVERB ON/OFF button ......................................... 43

REW button ............................................................... 19

SONG button ....................................................... 18, 33

SPLIT ON/OFF button .............................................. 14

STANDBY/ON switch .......................................... 9, 32

START/STOP button ................................................. 32

STYLE button ...................................................... 20, 33

SYNC START button ................................................ 21

TEMPO/TAP button .................................................. 48

TIMING button .......................................................... 37

TOUCH ON/OFF button ........................................... 45

VOICE button ...................................................... 12, 33

WAITING button ....................................................... 38

DC IN 12V jack ........................................................... 8

MIDI IN/OUT terminal .............................................. 61

PHONES/OUTPUT jack .............................................. 9

SUSTAIN jack ............................................................. 9

AB Repeat .................................................................. 41

AC Power Adaptor ....................................................... 8

ACMP ON/OFF ......................................................... 21

Auto Accompaniment ................................................ 21

Auto accompaniment range .................................. 21–22

Backup ........................................................................ 31

Backup Clear .............................................................. 31

Backup File ................................................................ 31

Battery .......................................................................... 8

Beat Display ............................................................... 34

Cancel ......................................................................... 30

Chord ........................................................ 22, 55–56, 58

Chord Dictionary ........................................................ 57

Chord Display ...................................................... 34, 56

Chorus ........................................................................ 44

Chorus Send Level (Dual) .......................................... 60

Chorus Send Level (Main) ......................................... 59

Chorus Send Level (Split) .......................................... 60

Chorus Type List ........................................................ 81

Computer .............................................................. 62–68

Delete (Song) ............................................................. 30

Demo .......................................................................... 19

Display ....................................................................... 34

Drum Kit .................................................................... 15

Drum Kit List ............................................................. 76

Dual ............................................................................ 13

Ending .................................................................. 50, 52

External Clock ...................................................... 60, 63

FF ............................................................................... 19

Flash Clear ................................................................. 31

Flash Memory ............................................................ 67

Footswitch (Sustain jack) ............................................. 9

Function Setting List ............................................ 59–60

Grade .......................................................................... 37

Harmony ............................................................... 42–43

Harmony Type List .................................................... 81

Harmony Volume ....................................................... 60

Panel Controls and Terminals Alphabetical Order

Index

PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 87

Initial Send ................................................................. 60

Initialization ............................................................... 31

Intro ...................................................................... 49, 52

Keyboard Display ...................................................... 34

Lesson .................................................................. 35–38

Lesson track R/L for transferred songs ................ 60, 68

Local .................................................................... 60, 62

Main/Auto fill ...................................................... 51–52

Master Volume Control ......................................... 9, 32

Measure ...................................................................... 34

Melody Voice ............................................................. 39

Metronome ........................................................... 24–26

Metronome Volume ................................................... 26

MIDI .......................................................................... 61

Music Database .......................................................... 23

Music Rest ................................................................... 6

Musicsoft Downloader ............................................... 65

Mute ........................................................................... 40

NO .............................................................................. 30

Notation ...................................................................... 34

Octave (Dual) ............................................................. 60

Octave (Main) ............................................................ 59

Octave (Split) ............................................................. 60

One Touch Setting ..................................................... 47

Option ........................................................................ 85

Panel Sustain .............................................................. 44

Part ............................................................................. 36

Pause .......................................................................... 19

PC setting ................................................................... 63

Press and Hold for a while ......................................... 32

Recording ............................................................. 27–29

Remote Control .......................................................... 64

Reverb ........................................................................ 43

Reverb Level .............................................................. 60

Reverb Type List ........................................................ 81

Rew ............................................................................ 19

Rhythm ....................................................................... 20

Root ...................................................................... 55, 57

Save data to computer ................................................ 68

SMF Format 0 ............................................................ 65

Song ............................................................................ 18

Song List .................................................................... 19

Song Volume .............................................................. 39

Split ............................................................................ 14

Split Point ............................................................. 14, 46

Start ............................................................................ 32

Stop ............................................................................ 32

Style .......................................................... 20–21, 49–52

Style File .............................................................. 54, 67

Style List .................................................................... 79

Style Volume .............................................................. 53

Supplied Accessories ............................................. 6, 85

Synchro Start ........................................................ 21, 49

Tempo ........................................................................ 48

Time Signature ........................................................... 25

Touch Response ......................................................... 45

Touch sensitivity ........................................................ 45

Track .............................................................. 28, 34, 40

Track Rec ............................................................. 28–29

Transfer ................................................................ 62, 68

Transpose ................................................................... 46

Tuning ........................................................................ 47

Turn Auto accompaniment on or off .......................... 21

User Song ............................................................. 27–28

Voice .................................................................... 12–14

Voice List ................................................................... 70

XGlite ........................................................................... 6

YES ............................................................................ 30

88 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual

Limited Warranty

90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS

Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed

below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models

included in the following series of products:

PSR, YPT SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS

If during the ﬁrst 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in

material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor.

If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject to

the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the

consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as

warranty replacements.

THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS.

ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS

LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY

EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these

limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.

This warranty gives you speciﬁc legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES

If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:

1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for

assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.

2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation

of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under

warranty.

3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.

*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the ﬁrst 90 days.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a

tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed.

4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and

to follow all safety precautions.

EXCLUSIONS

This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to

failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of:

1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modiﬁcation or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.

2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an

authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.

3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and

Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.

Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.

Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________

Purchased from____________________________________________________________ Date______________________________________

(Retailer)

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Electronic Service Division

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue

Buena Park, CA 90620

KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Switzerland

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/

HUNGARY/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria, CEE Department

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-868-07-57

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 6A

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),

Jingan, Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3467-3300

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 ﬂoor

Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan

Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

[PK] 38

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

WH70550 XXXPOTYX.X-01A0

Printed in China

Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page (English Only)

http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Transcripción de documentos

Owner’s Manual EN SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Warning: Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: Serial No. Purchase Date Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-BP (bottom) 2 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/ uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B) OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. (battery) PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injur y or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injur y to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged. • When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the battery fluid. • Keep batteries away from children. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. Power supply/AC power adaptor • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. • Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multipleconnector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. Battery Location • Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Do not dispose of batteries in fire. (4)-11 4 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. 1/2 • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Handling caution • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Saving data Saving and backing up your data • Some data items (page 31) are automatically saved as backup data in the internal memory even if you turn the power off. Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to external device such as a computer. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. When using a power adaptor, even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. ● COPYRIGHT NOTICE This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. ● Trademarks • Windows is the registered trademarks of Microsoft ® Corporation. • The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. (4)-11 2/2 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 5 Congratulations and thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-E313/YPT-310 PORTATONE! Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument in order to take full advantage of its various features. Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading, and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function. Formats and functions GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. Stereo Sampled Piano The instrument has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice—created by state-of-the-art stereo sampling technology and using Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone generation system. Yamaha Education Suite 5 The instrument features the new Yamaha Education Suite—a set of learning tools that utilize the latest technology to make studying and practicing music more fun and fulfilling than ever before! Touch Response The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you maximum expressive level control over the voices. Style File The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified format. Supplied Accessories The PSR-E313/YPT-310 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all. • Music rest • Owner’s manual (this book) 6 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual ● Music rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. Contents Formats and functions ............................................... 6 Supplied Accessories................................................. 6 Setting Up 8 Power Requirements ................................................. 8 Connecting headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) . 9 Connecting a footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) ................. 9 Using the MIDI Terminals .......................................... 9 Turn on the power...................................................... 9 Panel Controls and Terminals 10 Front Panel .............................................................. 10 Rear Panel ............................................................... 10 — Quick Guide — Step 1 Changing the Voices 12 Try playing a variety of instrument Voices ............... 12 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual ............. 13 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split ............................................... 14 Playing the Grand Piano Voice ................................ 15 Drum kits.................................................................. 15 Step 2 Fun Sounds 17 Step 3 Playing Songs 18 Select and Listen to a Specific Song ....................... 18 Step 4 Play with a Style 20 Selecting a rhythm of a Style ................................... 20 Playing with a Style.................................................. 21 Step 5 Play Using the Music Database 23 Step 6 Play With The Metronome Song settings 39 Changing the Melody Voice .................................... 39 Song Volume ........................................................... 39 Mute ........................................................................ 40 Practice Makes Perfect ........................................... 41 Play With a Variety of Effects 42 Adding Harmony...................................................... 42 Adding Reverb......................................................... 43 Adding Chorus......................................................... 44 Adding Panel Sustain .............................................. 44 Handy Performance Features 45 Touch Response Sensitivity .................................... 45 Setting the Split Point .............................................. 46 Transpose ............................................................... 46 Tuning ..................................................................... 47 One Touch Setting .................................................. 47 Changing the tempo of the Song/Style.................... 48 Adjusting the Voice Parameters .............................. 48 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions 49 Various ways to start and stop Style playback ........ 49 Pattern Variation (Sections) .................................... 51 Adjusting the Style Volume ..................................... 53 Registering Style Files............................................. 54 Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords 55 Easy Chords ............................................................ 55 Standard Chords ..................................................... 55 Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ...... 57 Function Settings 59 Select the item and change the value ..................... 59 About MIDI 61 What is MIDI? .......................................................... 61 What You Can Do With MIDI................................... 61 Transferring Performance Data To and From Another Instrument..................................... 62 Transferring data between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and a computer............. 65 24 Start the metronome ................................................ 24 Step 7 Record your own performance 27 Recording Your Performance .................................. 27 Recording to a specified track.................................. 28 Deleting User Songs ................................................ 30 Backup and Initialization 31 Backup ..................................................................... 31 Initialization .............................................................. 31 Basic Operation and Displays 32 Troubleshooting ...........................................................69 Voice List.......................................................................70 Maximum Polyphony ............................................... 70 Drum Kit List .................................................................76 Style List .......................................................................79 Music Database List .....................................................80 Effect Type List .............................................................81 MIDI Implementation Chart ..........................................82 MIDI Data Format ..........................................................84 Effect map ............................................................... 84 Specifications ...............................................................85 Index ..............................................................................86 Basic Operation ....................................................... 32 Display ..................................................................... 34 Song Lesson 35 Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn)........................................ 35 Lesson 2 (Timing) .................................................... 37 Lesson 3 (Waiting) ................................................... 38 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 7 Setting Up Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power. Power Requirements Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. ■ Using an AC Power Adaptor q Make sure that the power of the instrument is off (the backlit display is off). WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the instrument. w Connect the AC power adaptor to the power supply jack. e Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. w e AC power adaptor AC outlet ■ Using Batteries q Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. w Insert the six new alkaline batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the side of the compartment. e Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. CAUTION • Never connect or disconnect the AC power adaptor when the batteries are installed in the instrument and the power is on. Doing so will turn the power off, possibly resulting in loss of the data being transferred and the data currently in the transfer destination during transferring or recording a data. 8 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batteries are recommended.) When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur. When this happens, make sure to replace all batteries, following the precautions listed below. If necessary, also make sure to save all important User data (see page 31), since custom panel settings are lost when the batteries are removed. CAUTION • Use alkaline batteries for this instrument. Other types of batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may have sudden drops of power when battery power becomes low, possibly resulting in loss of data in the flash memory. • Make sure to install the batteries with the proper orientation, maintaining the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery installation may result in heat, fire and/or leaking of corrosive chemicals. • When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the same time. • If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time, remove the batteries from it, in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from the battery. • Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to flash memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred and the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost. Setting Up Make all necessary connections BEFORE turning the power on. Using the MIDI Terminals Connecting headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) The PSR-E313/YPT-310 speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. WARNING MIDI instrument The instrument also features MIDI terminals, allowing you to interface the instrument with other MIDI instruments or computers. (For more information, see page 61.) NOTE • MIDI cables (sold separately) must be used for connecting to MIDI devices. They can be bought at music stores, etc. • Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing. Turn on the power CAUTION • To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting and turn power off the devices before connecting them. Failure to observe these precautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON] switch to turn on the power. Pressing the switch again turns the power off. Connecting a footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) Backup data in the flash memory (page 31) is loaded to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no backup data exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is turned on. The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing an optional footswitch. Plug the Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. NOTE • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. CAUTION • When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, a small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from the instrument. CAUTION • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 9 Panel Controls and Terminals ■ Front Panel q [STANDBY/ON] switch ....................................page 9, 32 w [MASTER VOLUME] control ......................... pages 9, 32 When the lesson mode e LESSON PART [L] button .............................................................page 36 [R] button.............................................................page 36 When the recording mode e [REC TRACK 2] button........................................page 29 [REC TRACK 1] button........................................page 29 r [LISTEN & LEARN] button..................................page 36 t [TIMING] button...................................................page 37 y [WAITING] button ................................................page 38 u [FUNCTION] button..................................... pages 59, 33 i [SONG] button............................................. pages 18, 33 o [STYLE] button............................................ pages 20, 33 !0 [VOICE] button ............................................ pages 12, 33 !1 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+/YES], [-/NO] ............page 33 !2 [DEMO] button.....................................................page 19 !3 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button .........................page 24 When the Song mode !4 [A-B REPEAT] button..........................................page 41 !5 [REW] button .......................................................page 19 !6 [FF] button ...........................................................page 19 !9 [PAUSE] button....................................................page 19 When the Style mode !4 [ACMP ON/OFF] button ......................................page 21 !5 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button................................page 51 !6 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button...................................page 51 !9 [SYNC START] button.........................................page 21 !7 [TEMPO/TAP] button...........................................page 48 !8 [REC] button........................................................page 27 @0 [START/STOP] button .........................................page 32 @1 [PORTABLE GRAND] button..............................page 15 @2 [MUSIC DATABASE] button................................page 23 @3 [REVERB ON/OFF] button..................................page 43 @4 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button.......................................page 14 @5 [DUAL ON/OFF] button .......................................page 13 @6 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button ..............................page 42 @7 [TOUCH ON/OFF] button ....................................page 45 @8 Drum Kit...............................................................page 16 ■ Rear Panel @9 MIDI IN/OUT terminals ........................................page 61 #0 SUSTAIN jack.........................................................page 9 #1 PHONES/OUTPUT jack .........................................page 9 #2 DC IN 12V jack.......................................................page 8 10 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual ■ Front Panel Song List (page 19) q e w !4 !5 !6 !7 Style List (page 76) !8 Panel Controls and Terminals Music Database List (page 80) Display (page 34) Voice List (page 70) !2 t 001 GrandPno 001 y !9 !1 u r i o !3 !0 @1 @0 001 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 GrandPno 001 @8 ■ Rear Panel @9 #0 #1 #2 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 11 Step — Quick Guide — 1 Changing the Voices Try playing a variety of instrument Voices In addition to the piano Voice, a wide variety of other instrument Voices can be selected and played, including guitar, trumpet and flute. The Voice selected here becomes the Main Voice. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The Voice number and name are displayed. Voice number 001 Voice name GrandPno 001 2 Select a Voice. Select the desired Voice by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Voice List on page 70. 084 3 Play the keyboard. Try selecting and playing different Voices. 12 Appears when the Voice mode. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Flute The Voice shown here becomes the Main Voice for the instrument. Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual Quick Guide You can select a second Voice which will play in addition to the Main Voice selected on the previous page. This second Voice is known as the Dual Voice. Two Voices sound at the same time Play the Dual Voice Step 1 Changing the Voices Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button to turn the Dual function on. When Dual is on, you can play a Dual Voice in a layer with the Main Voice. To turn the Dual Voice off and play only the Main Voice, press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button again. Appears when Dual is on. 084 Flute 001 Selecting a Dual Voice The best-suited Dual Voice is automatically selected whenever you turn Dual on, but you can select any of the available Dual Voices. 1 Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “D. Voice” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the Dual Voice will appear. Currently selected Dual Voice 102 Marimba NOTE • You can also access the Dual Voice setting display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button several times, then selecting Dual Voice. 001 Hold for longer than a second. 2 Select a Dual Voice. Select the desired Dual Voice by using the number buttons [0]– [9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Voice List on page 70. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 13 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split In the Split mode you can play different Voices to the left and right of the keyboard “Split Point.” The main and Dual Voices can be played to the right of the Split Point, while the Voice played to the left of the Split Point is known as the “Split Voice” Split Point Main Voice and Dual Voice Split Voice Play the Split Voice Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button to turn the Split function on. When Split is on you can play a Split Voice to the left of the Split Point. When you don’t want to play a Split Voice, press the [SPLIT ON/ OFF] button to turn Split off. Appears when Split is on. 059 Choir NOTE 001 • The Split Point setting can be changed as required (page 46). Select a Split Voice You can select a different Split Voice by following the procedure outlined below. 1 Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “S. Voice” appears in the display for a few seconds, then the Split Voice will appear. The currently selected Split Voice 039 FngrBass 001 Hold for longer than a second. 2 14 Select a Split Voice Select the desired Split Voice by using the number buttons [0]– [9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Voice List on page 70. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • You can also access the Split Voice setting display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button several times, then selecting the Split Voice. Playing the Grand Piano Voice Quick Guide When you simply want to play a piano Voice, all you have to do is press one convenient button. Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. Step 1 Changing the Voices The Voice “Grand Piano 001” will automatically be selected as the Main Voice. Drum kits Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When drum kits (Voice number 109–121) are selected, you can play different percussion sounds directly from the keyboard. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. 2 Select the desired Drum kit. Select one of the Voice numbers from 109–121 by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Example: 109 Standard Kit 1 109 Std.Kit1 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 15 16 us h Br q h C us lic k H S Ta wir l p Sn Sw ir Sn are l Ba are Rol ss H l Ba Dr Sof ss um t So D ru m ft Ba Ha ss rd D ru m Sn Sna ar re e H M Fl H oo ar d r Fl Tom oo rT L om Lo H w M To id m T M om id L To C H mH hi ig n h R ese To id C m e C ym y Sp mb bal la al C C sh C up ra sh ym ba C y R id mb l e C al 2 ym ba C Bo l 2 on ng ga o H H M C ute on Ti ga m L ba l Ag e H og o Sa C H m ba ab Sa W asa h m ba istl W eH h G istle W uiro L oo L d on W Blo g oo ck d B H C loc ui ca k L Tr O ia ng pe n le Ji Op ng en le B Be ells ll T re e Br Se PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual la p ick C at d i-H an im t Sh ap ot Standard Kit 1 116 Jazz Kit 110 Standard Kit 2 117 Brush Kit 111 Room Kit 118 Symphony Kit 112 Rock Kit 119 SFX Kit 1 113 Electronic Kit 120 SFX Kit 2 114 Analog Kit 121 Sound Effect Kit 115 Dance Kit ui ca Tr Mut ia ng e l Sh e M u ak er te 109 C at i-H H C lo se d P H i-H eda l at O pe n C ra sh C R ym id e ba C ym l 1 ba Ta l1 m bo u C ow rine be ll Vi br as la p Bo ng o L C on ga H O pe Ti m n ba le Ag L og o L M ar ac as G ui ro Sh C o la ve rt s H H R St n de pe Si O Sl Ta p ne s ick St h h ta as C us us 3 Br Br ● Drum Kit List Try out each key. You’ll hear bongo drums, congas, maracas, and more—a comprehensive variety of drum and percussion sounds. Details on the instruments and key assignments of each drum kit can be found in the Drum Kit List on page 76. ● Example: 109 Standard Kit 1 To check which “Standard Kit 1” percussion sounds are assigned to each key, look at the icons printed above the keys. C3 Step 2 — Quick Guide — Fun Sounds Press the [VOICE] button. 2 Select the Sound Effect kit. Select Voice number 121 by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. 121 3 Step 2 Fun Sounds 1 Quick Guide This instrument also includes a wide range of unique sound effects. Try out each key and enjoy the sounds! As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound of a dog barking, running water, a creaking door and many other unique effects. SE Kit Try out each key. Try out each key and enjoy the sounds. Don’t forget the black keys! You’ll be able to play various sound effects from the keyboard: barking, braying, yelling, and much more. After trying out these sounds, press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button to reset the instrument Voice to the default setting of Voice “001 Grand Piano.” PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 17 Step — Quick Guide — 3 Playing Songs Select and Listen to a Specific Song This instrument has 102 built-in Songs. Listening to a Song. 1 Press the [SONG] button. The Song number and name are displayed. Song number 001 Song name Appears when the Song mode is active. Cruisin 001 2 3 18 Select the desired Song by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Song List on next page. 001–102 Built in Songs (see next page) 103–107 User Songs (Songs you record yourself). 108– Songs transferred from a computer on page 67 Press the [START/STOP] button. The Song will begin playing. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • You can play Songs recorded from the instrument or transferred from a computer. The procedure for playing these Songs is the same as that of the built-in Songs. Quick Guide ● Other Operations [REW] button ........... Fast-reverses the Song if pressed during playback (no sound is heard during fast reverse). Decreases the measure number if pressed while playback is stopped. [FF] button................ Fast-forwards the Song if pressed during playback. Increases the measure number if pressed while playback is stopped. [PAUSE] button ........ Temporarily stops playback. Press this button a second time to resume playback from the point at which it was stopped. Step 3 Playing Songs ● Using the [DEMO] button Press the [DEMO] button to play Songs 001, 002, 003, 004, 025, 041, 064, 084, 081, in sequence, and playback will continue repeatedly starting again from the first Song 001. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] button. ● Song List 004* 005* 006* 007* 008* 009* 010* 011* 012* 013* 014* 015* 016* 017* 018* 019* 020* 021* 022* 023* 024* 025* 026* 027* 028* 029* 030* 031 032 033 034 035 ˆ 001 002 003 Song Name TOP PICKS Cruisin Jessica Castaway CLASSICAL MELODIES Waltz (The Sleeping Beauty) (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Air (Orchestral Suite) (J. S. Bach) Minuetto/Boccherini (L. Boccherini) Siciliano/J. S. Bach (J. S. Bach) Menuet (L’Arlésienne) (G. Bizet) Slavonic Dances op.72-2 (A. Dvorák) Largo (From the New World) (A. Dvorák) Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II) Romanze/Beethoven (L. v. Beethoven) Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré) Méditation (Thaïs) (J. Massenet) Serenade/Haydn (F. J. Haydn) Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi) Danza dell’Ore (La Gioconda) (A. Ponchielli) Le Cygne (Le Carnaval des Animaux) (C. Saint-Saëns) L’éléphant (Le Carnaval des Animaux) (C. Saint-Saëns) Fossiles (Le Carnaval des Animaux) (C. Saint-Saëns) Wachet auf, ruft uns die Stimme BWV. 645 (J. S. Bach) TRADITIONAL MELODIES Greensleeves (Traditional) Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster) Amazing Grace (Traditional) Ring de Banjo (S. C. Foster) O du lieber Augustin (Traditional) London Bridge (Traditional) Aura Lee (Traditional) Aloha Oe (Q. Liliuokalani) Turkey in the Straw (Traditional) On Top of Old Smoky (Traditional) Grandfather’s Clock (H. C. Work) Pop Goes the Weasel (Traditional) Mary Had a Little Lamb (Traditional) ˆ No. No. 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 Song Name Yankee Doodle (Traditional) Muffin Man (Traditional) Ten Little Indians (Traditional) When the Saints Go Marching In (Traditional) Little Brown Jug (Traditional) Down by the Riverside (Traditional) When Irish Eyes Are Smiling (E. R. Ball) Oh! Susanna (S. C. Foster) Battle Hymn of the Republic (Traditional) American Patrol (F. W. Meacham) I’ve Been Working on the Railroad (Traditional) My Darling Clementine (Traditional) Camptown Races (S. C. Foster) Red River Valley (Traditional) Jingle Bells (J. S. Pierpont) PIANO SOLO Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven) Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” (F. Chopin) Menuett/Beethoven (L. v. Beethoven) Andante grazioso (Sonate K.331) (W. A. Mozart) 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin) Melodie (Album für die Jugend) (R. Schumann) Fröhlicher Landmann (Album für die Jugend) (R. Schumann) Von fremden Ländern und Menschen (Kinderszenen) (R. Schumann) Träumerei (Kinderszenen) (R. Schumann) Thema (Impromptus D.935-3) (F. Schubert) Menuett BWV. Anh.116 (J. S. Bach) Invention Nr.1 (J. S. Bach) Gavotte/J. S. Bach (J. S. Bach) Arietta/Grieg (E. Grieg) To a Wild Rose (E. A. MacDowell) Tango/Albeniz (I. Albéniz) La Fille aux Cheveux de Lin (C. A. Debussy) La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller) No. 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 Song Name Pastorale (J. F. Burgmüller) The Last Rose of Summer (Traditional) Annie Laurie (Traditional) Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair (S. C. Foster) The Entertainer (S. Joplin) PIANO ENSEMBLE Londonderry Air (Traditional) Die Lorelei (F. Silcher) Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop) Old Folks at Home (S. C. Foster) Scarborough Fair (Traditional) Loch Lomond (Traditional) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Traditional) Three Blind Mice (Traditional) Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär (Traditional) Believe Me If All Those Endearing Young Charms (Traditional) Funiculi Funicula (L. Denza) Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin) Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L’adieu” (F. Chopin) Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod (J. S. Bach/C. F. Gounod) Jesus bleibet meine Freude (J. S. Bach) Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach) Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov. (W. A. Mozart) Der Vogelfänger bin ich ja (W. A. Mozart) Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart) Die Schlittenfahrt K.605-3 (W. A. Mozart) Ave Verum Corpus (W. A. Mozart) Liebesträume Nr.3 (F. Liszt) O Mio Babbino Caro (G. Puccini) Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet) Frühlingslied (F. Mendelssohn) Ode to Joy (L. v. Beethoven) O Christmas Tree (Traditional) Deck the Halls (Traditional) Silent Night (F. Gruber) • Songs with an asterisk mark (*) are ones which do not have a left part. Therefore, the lesson is applicable only for the right hand. • Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. • A Song Book is available that includes scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website. http://music.yamaha.com/registration/ PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 19 Step — Quick Guide — 4 Play with a Style Selecting a rhythm of a Style The Style feature provides backing and rhythm parts in a wide variety of musical categories, including rock, blues, techno and much more. Here’s how to play a rhythm of a Style. The rhythm sound consists of percussion instruments. 1 Press the [STYLE] button. The Style number and name are displayed. Style number 001 Style name 8BtModrn Appears when the Style mode is active. 001 2 Select a Style. Select the desired Style by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Style List on page 76. 016 HH Light You can also select commercially available Style Files. To do this load the Style Files from the computer to the instrument, and then register the style data starting with to style number 107. (Refer to the information on transferring data on page 67 and registering styles on page 54.) You can play Style Files in the same way that you play the internal styles. If the Style File has not been registered, “No Data” will be displayed when selecting style number 107. 3 20 Press the [START/STOP] button. The Style rhythm will start. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Since the Pianist category Styles (098–106) have no rhythm parts, no sound will be produced if you start rhythm-only playback. To use these Styles, turn on the auto accompaniment and play the keyboard as described on pages 21–22. (The bass and chord accompaniment parts will sound.) Playing with a Style Press the [STYLE] button and then select a Style. Turn auto accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button again to turn the auto accompaniment off. 001 Step 4 Play with a Style 1 2 Quick Guide On the previous page, you’ve learned how to select your favorite rhythm of a Style. Here, you’ll learn how to expand on that rhythm with bass and chord backing, and use all of it as your accompaniment as you play. 8BtModrn 001 Appears when auto accompaniment is on ● When auto accompaniment is on ... NOTE The keys to the left of the Split Point (54; F#2) will play only chords. This is known as the “Auto Accompaniment range.” • You can change the Split Point. Refer to “Setting the Split Point” on page 46. Split Point (54; F#2) Auto Accompaniment range 3 Turn SYNC START on. Press the [SYNC START] button. 001 8BtModrn 001 Flashes when Sync Start is on. When the Sync Start standby mode is engaged, Style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. You can turn off Sync Start standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START] button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 21 4 The Style will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Not sure how to play chords? No problem! This instrument is capable of playing chords even if you only play one key. Try playing one, two or three keys (any notes will do) in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. Different keys will produce different results. Refer to page 55 for detailed instructions for playing chords. Split Point Auto Accompaniment range 5 Try playing other chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand. Split Point Auto Accompaniment range 6 22 You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 5 — Quick Guide — Play Using the Music Database Quick Guide Step You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ... simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and style! Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. 001 Step 5 Play Using the Music Database 1 AlvFever A Music Database name will appear in the display. 2 Select a Music Database. Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 80 of the manual, use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select a music database. Select one that matches the image of the song you intend to play. For this example select the “051 MoonLit”. 051 3 MoonLit Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right. The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the split point (page 46). Refer to page 55 for information about playing chords. Split Point Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 23 Step — Quick Guide — 6 Play With The Metronome Start the metronome The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Play and set the tempo that is most comfortable for you. Starting the metronome Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [METRONOME ON/ OFF] button. To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button again. 001 GrandPno 1 1 Displays the current beat. Setting the metronome tempo 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to display the tempo. Tempo value 090 2 24 Tempo Set the metronome tempo by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. The tempo can be adjusted between 11–280. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button for longer than a second to select the number of beats per measure function “TimeSigN”. Number of beats per measure. 04 TimeSigN Hold for longer than a second. 2 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the number of beats per measure. A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while the other beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at the beginning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”. The available range is from 0 through 60. Select 5 for this example. 3 NOTE • The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style or song is playing. Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times to select the beat length function “TimeSigD”. The currently selected beat length will be displayed. 04 TimeSigD The length of one beat. 4 Use the [+], [-] to select the beat length. Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or 16th note). Select 8 for this example. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 25 Step 6 Play With The Metronome 1 Quick Guide In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature. Setting the Metronome Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “MetroVol” appears. 100 MetroVol Metronome Volume 2 26 Set the metronome volume by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 7 — Quick Guide — Record your own performance Quick Guide Step Recording Your Performance 1 Step 7 Record your own performance You can record up to five of your own performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song numbers 103–107). Think of each User Song as a kind of basket or drawer for storing your recording. Remember that you can also record a Style (containing chord changes) along with your own performance. Press the [REC] button. NOTE Flashes rEC • A total of approximately 10,000 notes or 5,500 chord changes can be recorded to the five User Songs. User 1 001 NOTE • Accompaniment cannot be turned on or off once the [REC] button is pressed. The lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song (Song numbers 103–107) available for recording is displayed. If you want to select the Song you will be recording, select the desired Song number by using the [+] and [-] buttons. After you’ve selected the desired User Song for recording, you can select a Style to be recorded as well. To do this, press the [STYLE] button and select the Style number while the ACMP indication is on. You can turn off the Record mode by pressing the [REC] button again ( and stop flashing). 2 Start recording. When you play the keyboard, recording will begin. CAUTION Split Point By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when the Auto Accompaniment is set to on, the Style starts sounding and is recorded with your performance. When Auto Accompaniment is set to off, only your keyboard performance is recorded. • If all User Songs (Song numbers 103–107) contain recorded data, Song 103 will automatically be selected. In this case, you will record over and erase any previous data in Song 103, so be careful that you won’t be erasing any material you want to keep! PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 27 3 Stop recording. CAUTION Pressing the [START/STOP] button stops recording and writes the data to the User Song. (A “Writing!” message is shown.) To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/ STOP] button. ●In order to record with the Style, turn the Auto Accompaniment to on (see Steps 1–2 on page 21), and then record according to the instructions. (The “ACMP ON” lights.) ● In order to record only your performance, turn the Auto Accompaniment to off and record according to the normal steps. • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. CAUTION • Keep in mind that any kind of power failure during recording—such as the power being turned off, the AC adaptor being plugged/unplugged or the batteries running down— will result in data loss. NOTE (The “ACMP ON” is unlit.) • Use the Musicsoft Downloader to backup the User Songs to a computer (page 65). Recording to a specified track The User Songs are organized into two tracks: Track 1 and Track 2. You can specify the track you want to record to. About track recording If you start recording by specifying a track, the track will be overwritten (existing data in the track is deleted and replaced with the new recording). User Song Data that can be recorded to Track 2 Style playback* (including chord changes) or your own keyboard performance Data that can be recorded to Track 1 Your own keyboard performance only • You cannot record the Reverb Level, metronome click, or the Transpose and Tuning settings. Recording to the specified track Only your keyboard performance can be recorded to Track 1. Either a Style or your performance can be recorded to Track 2, resulting in a User Song like that depicted below. User Song Style 28 • Record following the steps in the previous page, and your performance will be recorded to Track 1 and the Style (if you are playing one) will be recorded to Track 2. NOTE * When playing the Style Track 2 NOTE User Song Track 1 Track 2 Track 1 Your own keyboard Your own keyboard Your own keyboard performance performance performance PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual • The settings and buttons below cannot be changed, or if changed, the new settings cannot be recorded if entered during the recording process. ACMP ON/OFF, split point, reverb type, chorus type, harmony type, [FUNCTION] button, [PORTABLE GRAND] button, [SOUND EFFECT KIT] button. Turn ACMP (auto accompaniment) on or off, depending on what you want to record. NOTE If you want to record Style playback, turn ACMP on. If you want to record only your own keyboard performance, turn ACMP off. 2 • Keep in mind that both Tracks 1 and 2 will be overwritten with new data if you record without specifying the tracks. Specify the track you want to record. Specify the track 2 when you want to record the Style. When you want to record your own keyboard performance, you can specify either track. ● Recording to Track 1 Press the [REC] button and [REC TRACK 1] button simultaneously. rEC • The both “L” and “R” flashes, this indicates that you have specified Track 1 when the Auto Accompaniment is on. If you want to record your own performance, press the [TRACK 2] button to stop the “L” flashing. If you want to record a Style, press the [REC] button to cancel the recording, and repeat the procedure from the beginning. User 1 001 Flashes when track 1 is selected for recording. Press simultaneously ● Recording to Track 2 Press the [REC] button and [REC TRACK 2] button simultaneously. rEC Flashes when track 2 is selected for recording. User 1 001 Press simultaneously 3 Lights when recorded data exists. Turns off when there is no recorded data, or when Mute is set to on (page 40) to turn off playback of the track. Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the User Song you want to record. rEC User 3 If you want to record Style playback to Track 2, press the [STYLE] button and select the desired Style. 4 NOTE Start recording Perform steps 2 and 3 on pages 27–28. By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when the Auto Accompaniment is set to on, the Style starts sounding and is recorded. Only your performance is recorded by playing the keyboard (any key is OK) when the Auto Accompaniment is set to off. • You can record a new track while listening to a previously recorded track (the track indication will appear). You can also mute recorded tracks (the track will disappear) while recording a new track by pressing the desired track button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 29 Step 7 Record your own performance 1 Quick Guide Specifying track recording Deleting User Songs Deleting an entire User Song NOTE • You cannot delete a specific track from a User Song. 1 Press the [SONG] button and select the User Song you want to delete by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. 103 2 User 1 Press and hold the [REC] button for longer than a second. The Song Delete display appears. YEs ClrUser1 Hold for longer than a second. You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] button. 3 Press the [+/YES] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. YEs Sure? You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] button. 4 Press the [+/YES] button to delete the Song. “Writing!” message will appear while the track is being deleted. Writing! 30 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Backup and Initialization Backup The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below. You can also save the settings as backup data to your computer, by using the Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. Refer to the section “Transferring a backup file from the PSRE313/YPT-310 to a computer” on page 68. ● Parameters that are saved in backup: • User Songs • Style number 107 • Touch Response on/off setting • The following Function settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Demo Cancel, Panel Sustain Initialization This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures are provided. Backup Clear To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory (described above), turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored. CAUTION • When you execute the Backup Clear operation, backup parameters will be cleared. Flash Clear To clear Song data and Style data that has been transferred to the internal flash memory from a computer, simultaneously hold down the highest white key and the three highest black keys on the keyboard and turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch. CAUTION • When you execute the Flash Clear operation, Song data and Style data you have purchased and downloaded will also be cleared. Make sure to save your important data by transferring to a computer using Musicsoft Downloader (page 68). PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 31 Basic Operation and Displays Basic Operation Turning the power on Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON] switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again to turn the power OFF. Adjusting the volume Turn the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. Rotate clockwise to increase the volume. Rotate counterclockwise to lower the volume. 001 GrandPno 001 About the [START/STOP] button Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE] button to start playback of the selected Song or Style (rhythm). 32 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual The “Press & Hold” Symbol The “Press & Hold” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call up a related or different function. Basic Operation and Displays Press a button to select a basic function Press the [SONG] button to select a Song. Press the [STYLE] button to select a Style. When you select a basic function, the name and number of the currently selected Song, Style and Voice is shown. From this display, you can select the desired Song, Style or Voice. Press the [VOICE] button to select a Voice. Set the number or value ● Number buttons [0]–[9] The number buttons can be used to directly enter a Song, Style or Voice number or parameter value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes, the first zeroes can be omitted Example: Selecting Voice 002, Bright Piano. 002 BritePno Press number buttons [0], [0], [2]. Function Settings (page 59) The [FUNCTION] button contains 34 settings. Each time you press the [FUNCTION] button, the setting item is selected in sequence, and the value of the selected item can be changed in the display. ● [+], [-] buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease the value in the corresponding direction. Press briefly to decrease. Press briefly to increase. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 33 Basic Operation and Displays Display The Main display shows all of the current basic settings for Song, Style and Voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status for various functions. Song/recording track display Notation Displays the melody and chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use, or the notes of chords you specify when the Dictionary function is in use. At other times the notes you play on the keyboard are displayed. Information related to the Song/recording tracks is shown here. (See pages 27 and 40.) Lit: Track contains data Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data Flashing: Track is selected as recording track Measure Indicates the current measure during playback of a Song. NOTE • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va” in the notation. • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in the notation section of the display. This is due to space limitations in the display. 001 Beat Display Indicates the beat of the current Style or Song with flashing arrows. GrandPno 003 Chord Display Indicates the name of the chord currently being played back, or the name of the chord being played on the keyboard. ACMP ON Appears when the auto accompaniment is on. Keyboard Display Indicates notes currently being played. Indicates the melody and chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use. Also indicates the notes of a chord—either when playing a chord or when using the Dictionary function. 34 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual DUAL Appears when the Dual function is on (page 13). HARMONY Appears when the Harmony function is on (page 42). SPLIT Appears when the Split function is on (page 14). REVERB Appears when Reverb is on (page 43). TOUCH RESPONSE Appears when Touch Response is on (page 45). 003 Song Lesson Yamaha Education Suite 5 You can select any Song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. Song Lesson lets you learn how to play Songs in three easy steps. Songs that can be used with the Lesson feature include Songs transferred from a computer to flash memory (SMF Format 0 only; see page 65). The procedure for transferring songs are described on page 67. ■ Lesson Flow Select a Song for your lesson. Select the part you want to practice. Select the practice method. Start the Lesson! ■ The practice methods: Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn) ........ Listen and learn the melody or rhythm of a selected Song. Lesson 2 (Timing) ...................... Learn to play the notes at the correct timing along with the Song. Lesson 3 (Waiting) ..................... Learn to play the correct notes. Lesson 1 (Listen & Learn) There’s no need to play the keyboard in Lesson 1. The model melody/chords (in other words, the musical material you should learn) of the part you selected will sound. Listen to it carefully and learn it well. 1 NOTE • User Songs cannot be used for the lesson. NOTE Select the desired Song for your lesson. Press the [SONG] button, and then select a Song (referring to the Song list on page 19) by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-]. If you want to practice a Song you’ve transferred from a computer, select one of the Songs beginning from Song number 108. 068 • You cannot select the part during Song playback before Lesson 1 starts. If a Song is currently being played back, stop the Song first, then continue from Step 2. Chevaler 001 The instrument includes 102 built in Songs. Some Songs (as shown below) are intended for use as right-hand lessons, and cannot be used for left-hand or both-hands lessons. ● Songs for right-hand lesson Song numbers: 004–030 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 35 Song Lesson 2 Select the part you want to practice. Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a bothhands lesson. The selected part is displayed. Left-hand lesson Right-hand lesson Left Right Both-hands lesson BothHand A “No LPart” message is shown in the display if you select the left part in one of the Songs 004–030, which do not have left part data. These Songs cannot be used for left-hand or both-hands lessons. NOTE • For songs transferred from a computer, the “No LPart” indication does not appear, even when there is no left hand part in the song. No LPart 3 Start Lesson 1. Press the [LISTEN & LEARN] button to start Lesson 1. The melody of the part you selected in Step 2 will sound. Listen to it carefully and learn it well. r1 LISTEN 011 The notation and key positions of the model melody are shown in the display. 4 36 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Even after Lesson 1 has started and the Song is playing, you can still select the part. • When the melody Voice of the Song is changed, the key position shown in the display may be shifted (in octave units), depending on the Voice selected. • You can select Lessons 1–3 by pressing the [LISTEN & LEARN], [TIMING] and [WAITING] buttons, respectively. Song Lesson Lesson 2 (Timing) In this lesson, try playing the notes with the correct timing. Simply concentrate on playing each note in time with the rhythmic accompaniment. The correct notes sound even if you play wrong notes as long as you play in time with the rhythm. 1 Select a Song for your lesson. • You cannot use Dual or Split Voices during lessons. • The Split Point is fixed and it cannot be changed. For the left-hand lesson, it is fixed at 59 or B2; for the left-hand chord lesson, it is fixed at 54 or F#2. NOTE • You cannot select the part during Song playback before Lesson 2 starts. If a Song is currently being played back, stop the Song first, then continue from Step 2. 2 Select the part you want to practice. 3 Start Lesson 2. Press the [TIMING] button to start Lesson 2. r2 NOTE NOTE • Even after Lesson 2 has started and the Song is playing, you can still select the part. TIMING 004 Play the notes shown in the display. In Lesson 2, simply play each note in time with the music. 4 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Grade When the lesson Song has played all the way through in Lesson mode 2 or 3, your performance will be evaluated in four levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. OK Good Very0Good Excellent PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 37 Song Lesson Lesson 3 (Waiting) In this mode, try playing the correct notes. The notes you should play appear in the score and the keyboard on the display. The Song pauses until you play the right note. 1 Select a Song for your lesson. NOTE 2 Select the part you want to practice. 3 Start Lesson 3. Press the [WAITING] button to start Lesson 3. r3 WAITING Play the notes shown in the display. Try playing the correct notes. 4 38 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual • You cannot select the part during Song playback before Lesson 3 starts. If a Song is currently being played back, stop the Song first, then continue from Step 2. NOTE • Even after Lesson 3 has started and the Song is playing, you can still select the part. Song settings Changing the Melody Voice You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other Voice you prefer. NOTE • You cannot change the melody Voice of a User Song. 1 Select the Song and play it. Refer to the section “Playing Songs” on page 18. 2 Select a desired Voice by using the number buttons [0]– [9], [+], [-]. 004 HnkyTonk 001 The selected Voice sounds when you play the keyboard. If a Song has played through and stopped during this procedure, press the [START/STOP] button to start playback again. 3 Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, indicating that the Voice selected in Step 2 has replaced the Song’s original melody Voice. Hold for longer than a second. Song Volume This procedure allows you to adjust the balance between Song playback and the notes you play on the keyboard by setting the volume of the playback sound. 1 Press the [SONG] button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 39 Song settings 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “SongVol” appears. Current Song Volume 100 3 Song Volume SongVol Set the Song Volume by pressing the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. NOTE • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to its default setting (100). Mute You can mute Track 1 or Track 2 during Song playback. • Track 1 can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 1] button during Song playback. • Track 2 can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 2] button during Song playback. You can cancel the mute function by pressing the corresponding track buttons, [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] again during Song playback, or by selecting any other Song. 001 Cruisin 010 Pressing one of the Track buttons [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] will mute the corresponding track during Song playback. 40 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Lit—track contains data. Unlit—track is muted or contains no data. Song settings Practice Makes Perfect You can repeatedly practice a section you find difficult. This function lets you specify a section of a Song you want to practice—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback. A B Repeat playback of this section 1 Play the Song and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of the section you want to repeat (the “A” point). “A-REPEAT” will be displayed. A- 2 REPEAT • If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the Song press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the Song. REPEAT You can stop repeat playback by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button. The A-B REPEAT mode will be canceled and normal playback of the Song will continue. oFF • The repeat start and end points can be specified in one-measure increments. • You can also set the A-B Repeat function when the Song is stopped. Simply use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to select the desired measures, pressing the [AB REPEAT] button for each point, then start playback. Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a second time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). The specified A-B section of the Song will now play repeatedly, letting you practice the section over and over. A-b NOTE NOTE • The A-B Repeat function will be canceled when you select another Song or Style mode. REPEAT PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 41 Play With a Variety of Effects Adding Harmony This feature adds harmony notes as well as tremolo or echo effects to the Main Voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY] button to turn harmony on. When you don’t want to add harmony notes, press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button again to turn Harmony off. Appears when harmony is on. 2 Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “HarmType” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the Harmony Type. Currently selected Harmony type 02 Trio Hold for longer than a second. 3 42 Select a desired Harmony Type by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 81. Try playing the keyboard with the harmony function. The effect and operation of each Harmony Type is different—refer to the section “How to sound each Harmony Type” on the next page as well as the Harmony Type List for details. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn this feature on, the appropriate Harmony type for the currently selected Main Voice is automatically selected. NOTE • You can also access the Harmony Type setting display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button several times. • Harmony will be turned off if the Chord Dictionary function is used. Play With a Variety of Effects NOTE ● How to sound each Harmony Type • Harmony type 01–05 • Harmony type 13–19 (Tremolo) Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 21). Keep holding down the keys. • The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual or Split Voices. • The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit). • Harmony type 20–26 (Echo) • Harmony type 06–12 (Trill) Keep holding down the keys. Hold down two keys. You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 59). Adding Reverb Reverb adds the ambience of a room or concert hall to the sound that you play on the keyboard. To add Reverb Press the [REVERB ON/OFF] button to turn Reverb on. Reverb is normally on. You can check how the selected Reverb Type sounds by playing the keyboard. To turn Reverb off, press the [REVERB ON/OFF] button again. Appears when Reverb is on. Select a Reverb Type The ideal type is automatically selected whenever you select a Song or Style, but you can select any of the available Reverb Types. 1 Press and hold the [REVERB ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “REVERB” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the Reverb Type. 02 Hall2 Currently selected Reverb Type Hold for longer than a second. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 43 Play With a Variety of Effects 2 Select the desired Reverb Type by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Reverb Type list on page 81 for details. You can adjust the Reverb depth in the Function Settings (page 59). NOTE • You can also access the Reverb Type setting display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button several times. Adding Chorus This effect makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more spacious. The best-suited Chorus type is automatically selected whenever you select a Voice; however, you can select any of the available types. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Chorus” appears. “Chorus” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the Chorus Type. 1 2 Chorus1 Currently selected Chorus Type Select a desired Chorus Type by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Chorus Type list on page 81 for details. You can adjust the Chorus depth independently for the Main, Dual and Split Voices in the Function Settings (page 59). Adding Panel Sustain This function adds a fixed sustain to the keyboard Voices. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Sustain” item appears. oFF Sustain Current setting 2 Press the [+] button to turn the Panel Sustain on. Panel Sustain will be added to the notes you play on the keyboard when the Panel Sustain is on. To turn it off, press the [-] button. on Sustain On 44 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • See the section “Connecting a footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)” on page 9 for information on applying sustain with the optional footswitch. Handy Performance Features Touch Response Sensitivity Touch Response Appears when Touch Response is on. NOTE • The Touch Response function cannot be used for some Voices (such as organ), even if the Touch Response icon appears in the display. Press the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button to turn Touch Response on. When Touch Response is on, you can control the volume of notes according to how hard you play the keys. Touch Response is normally on. Press the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button again to turn the Touch Response off. When Touch Response is off, the same volume will be produced no matter how hard you play the keys. Setting the Touch Sensitivity When Touch Response is on, you can adjust the sensitivity of the keyboard in response to keyboard dynamics in three steps. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics—in other words, greater sensitivity. 1 Press and hold the [TOUCH ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. “TouchSns” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the current Touch Sensitivity value. Currently selected Touch Sensitivity 2 Medium Hold for longer than a second. 2 Select a Touch Sensitivity setting between 1 and 3 by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 45 Handy Performance Features Setting the Split Point The Split Point setting can be changed as desired. Split Point—default setting: 54 (F#2) 36 48 60 72 84 96 The initial default Split Point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key. When you change the Split Point, the auto accompaniment range also changes. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “SplitPnt” appears. Currently selected Split Point 054 Split Point SplitPnt 001 NOTE 2 Split Point Set the Split Point by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to its default setting (54 or F#2). Transpose The overall pitch of the instrument can be shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “Transpos” appears. Current transpose value 00 2 Transpos Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to set the Transpose value between -12 and +12 as required. NOTE • The pitch of the Drum Kits Voices (Voice numbers 109–121) cannot be changed. • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to its default setting (00). 46 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Tuning You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument. The overall tuning of the instrument can be shifted up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1cent increments (100 cents = 1 semitone). 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until “Tuning” appears. Currently tuning value 000 2 Tuning Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] to set the Tuning value between -100 and +100 as required. NOTE • The pitch of the Drum Kits Voices (Voice numbers 109–121) cannot be changed. • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to its default setting (000). One Touch Setting Sometimes selecting the ideal Voice to play with a Song or Style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects the most suitable Voice for you when you select a Style or Song. Simply select Voice number “000” to activate this feature. 1 Press the [VOICE] button, and then select Voice number “000” by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Appears when One Touch Setting is on. 000 SprnoSax This turns the One Touch Setting feature on. One Touch Setting will be turned off if you select any other Voice number. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 47 Handy Performance Features Changing the tempo of the Song/Style Songs and Styles can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow. 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo setting in the display after selecting a Style/Song. Current Tempo value 116 2 Tempo Set the Tempo by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. You can also set the Tempo by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—four times for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3. You can change the Tempo during Style/Song playback by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice. Adjusting the Voice Parameters The volume, octave (the pitch of the instrument can be shifted by up or down in octaves) and Chorus Send Level can be individually adjusted for the Main, Dual, and Split Voices. ● Main Voice Parameters (page 59) • Main Voice Volume • Main Voice Octave • Main Voice Chorus Send Level ● Dual Voice Parameters (page 60) • Dual Voice Volume • Dual Voice Octave • Dual Voice Chorus Send Level ● Split Voice Parameters (page 60) • Split Voice Volume • Split Voice Octave • Split Voice Chorus Send Level You can adjust each of the parameters above in the Function settings (page 59). 48 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the default tempo of a Style or Song. Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Various ways to start and stop Style playback Starting Style playback The following three methods can be used to start Style playback. In all cases you will need to press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on before actually starting Style playback. Whichever method you choose, you can press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] before starting playback. To begin your performance, an introduction will play automatically, then will automatically switch to the MAIN section when finished. ■ Immediate Start Press the [START/STOP] button to begin rhythm-only playback of the selected Style. The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Appears when the auto accompaniment is on Immediate Start ■ Chord Start Press the [SYNC START] button and the beat arrows will begin flashing, indicating that the Sync Start “standby” mode has been engaged. The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Accompaniment range 001 GrandPno 001 Sync Start standby Style playback begins when you play a chord ■ Tap Start You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at any tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and 3 times for time signatures in 3—and the selected Style rhythm will begin playing at the tapped tempo. The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Start at the tapped tempo PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 49 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Stopping Style playback The following three methods can be used to stop Style playback. ■ Immediate Stop Playback will stop as soon as you press the [START/STOP] button. Immediate Stop ■ Stop and Enter Sync Start Mode If you press the [SYNC START] button during Style playback, playback will stop immediately and the Sync Start standby mode will be engaged (beat arrows will flash). Stop immediately and enter the Sync Start mode 001 GrandPno 001 Sync Start standby ■ Play the Ending and Stop Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button to begin playing an ending section. Playback will stop when the ending has played all the way through. Stop after ending plays If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button a second time (while the ending is playing), the ending will play in ritardando (the tempo will gradually get slower). 50 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Pattern Variation (Sections) The instrument features a wide variety of Style “sections” (patterns) that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the Song you are playing. Intro Main A/B Ending Auto fill ● INTRO section This is used for the beginning of the Song When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. ● MAIN section This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand. ● Fill-in section This is automatically added before changing the section A and B. ● ENDING section This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. 1 2 Press the [STYLE] button and then select a Style. Turn auto accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Appears when the auto accompaniment is on. 3 Turn SYNC START on. Press the [SYNC START] button. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 51 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. MAIN A The name of the selected section—MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. INTRO≥A 6 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords” on page 55. Accompaniment range 7 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. FILL A≥B When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section A/B. 8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. ENDING This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. 52 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Adjusting the Style Volume This procedure allows you to adjust the balance between Style playback and the notes you play on the keyboard by setting the volume of the playback sound. 1 2 Press the [STYLE] button. Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “StyleVol” appears. Current Style volume setting 100 3 Style Volume StyleVol Set the Style volume by using the number buttons [0]– [9], [+], [-]. NOTE • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to its default setting (100). PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 53 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Registering Style Files This instrument features 106 internal styles, but other styles, such as those which can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be registered into style number 107 and used in the same way as the internal styles. In order to use the style file register function, the file must already have been transferred from the computer to the instrument. The procedure for transferring files from a computer to the instrument is described on page 65 (“Transferring data between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and a computer”). The procedure described below registers a style file that has already been transferred from a computer to the instrument into style number 107. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button as many time as necessary to select the style file load function “StyleReg”. StyleReg After about 2 seconds the name of a registerable style file will appear in the display. If multiple loadable style files have been transferred to the instrument, you can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other files in sequence. 2 Execute the register operation. With the name of the style file you want to register shown in the display, press the number [0] button. 3 A confirmation message for the register operation will appear. Press the [+/YES] button to actually register the file. 54 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords You’ve learned in the section “Play with a Style (Accompaniment)” on page 20 that the “feel” of the Style changes every time you play a chord on the left-hand side of the keyboard. Here, you’ll learn the types of the chords and how to play them in greater detail. The examples of chords are given here in the key of C. There are two basic ways (below) you can play the chords on the left-hand side of the keyboard, while playing the Style (page 21) Split Point—default setting: 54 (F#2) ■ Easy Chords ■ Standard Chords 36 48 60 72 84 96 Easy Chords This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. C Cm • To play a major chord Press the root note of the chord. C7 • To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. Cm 7 • To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. NOTE • Root notes and the corresponding keys Accompaniment range • To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). Standard Chords This method lets you produce accompaniment by playing chords using normal fingerings in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. CmM 7 CmM 7 (9) ( ) ( ( C (b5) CM7 b5 Cm 7 (9) Cm 7 (11) ) CM 7 aug CM7 (#11) ( Caug ) Csus 4 CM 7 (9) CM 7 ) C6 ) C (9) ( C 6 (9) C Cm (9) Cm 6 Cm 7 Cm 7 b5 CmM 7 b5 Cdim Cdim 7 C7 C 7 (13) C 7 (#9) C 7 b5 C 7 aug C 7 sus4 ) ( ) ( ) ) ( ( ) ( C 1+2+5 ) ) ( C 7 (b13) ( ) ( ( C 7 (b9) ) ) ( ) ( C 7 (#11) C 7 (9) ( ( ) ) ( ) Cm * Notes enclosed in parentheses are optional; the chords will be recognized without them. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 55 Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords ● Recognized Standard Chords Chart Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Major [M] 1-3-5 Chord (C) C Display C Add ninth [(9)] 1-2-3-5 C(9) C(9) Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 C6 Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6(9) C6(9) * Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 CM7 CM7 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7(9) CM7(9) * CM7(#11) CM7(#11)* 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5 C(b5) Cb5 * Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7b5 CM7b5 * Suspended fourth [sus4] 1-4-5 Csus4 Csus4 Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 Caug Caug Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug CM7aug * Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm(9) Cm(9) Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6 Cm6 Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7 Cm7 Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7(9) Cm7(9) Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7(11) Cm7(11) * Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7 CmM7 Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7(9) CmM7(9) * Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Cm7b5 Cm7b5 Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7b5 CmM7b5 * Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Cdim Cdim Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7 Cdim7 Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - b7 C7 C7 Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(b9) C7(b9) Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 C7(b13) C7(b13) Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(9) C7(9) Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 C7(#11) C7(#11) Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7(13) C7(13) Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(#9) C7(#9) Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7 C7b5 C7b5 * Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C7aug C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C7sus4 C7sus4 One plus two plus five [1+2+5] 1-2-5 C1+2+5 C* * These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary function. 56 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1+5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords. • The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), 1+2+5 • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes shown in parentheses are omitted. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord dictionary” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press and hold the [WAITING] button for longer than a second. “Dict.” will appear in the display. Dict. Hold for longer than a second. 2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled “ROOT > .” (The note doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown in the display. Keys for chord type dictionary Keys for root dictionary Dict. 001 3 Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard labeled “CHORD TYPE > .” (The note doesn’t sound.) The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Notation of chord Dict. NOTE • Major chords are usually indicated by the root name only. For example, the indication “C” in a score refers to a “C Major” chord. To look up the fingering for a major chord press the root key and then the M chord type key. 001 Chord name (root and type) Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. 4 Try playing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flashes. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 57 Playing Auto Accompaniment Chords ■ About chords Playing two or more notes together simultaneously creates a “chord.” Playing a note together with two other notes spaced three notes (steps) apart—such as the notes C, E and G—creates a harmonious sound. Chords like these are called “triads” and they play an important role in most music. 3rd Root 3rd Taking the chord above as an example, the lowest note of this triad is called the “root note.” This is the central note sound, and it supports or anchors the rest of the notes chord. You’ll notice that the middle note of the chord above (E) is the third step in the succession of scale notes—C, D, then E. There are two types of “thirds” in chords: major thirds and minor thirds. Major third—four half steps from the root Minor third—three half steps from the root We’ll also alter the top note of our original chord and make three additional chords, as shown below. (The captions indicate the intervals between each of the notes.) ◆ Major chord ◆ Minor chord CM Minor 3rd ◆ Augmented chord Cm Major 3rd Major 3rd ◆ Diminished chord C aug Minor 3rd Major 3rd C dim Major 3rd Minor 3rd Minor 3rd The basic characteristics of the chord sound are same, no matter if we change the order of the notes from bottom to top, or if we add other same name notes in different octaves. Beautiful sounding harmonies can be built in this manner, and emotional music can be created by playing different chords one after the other according to commonly accepted rules. Harmony determines the nature of chords, and music is created based on harmony. ● Chord names From the chord name, you can tell at a glance what type of chord it is and which notes make up the chord. Understanding the basic structure of chords is very useful—once you’re familiar with this, you’ll be quickly and easily play chords by looking at the names that appear above the notation. Cm Root note Chord type ● Chord types (These chords are among those that can be recognized by the Fingered method.) Suspended 4 th 7 th C sus4 Perfect 5th C7 Perfect 4th Minor/major 7 th Flatted 7 th 58 Minor chord Major chord Flatted 7 th PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Minor chord Major 7 th C 7sus4 C m7 Flatted 5 th Minor 7 th chord Major chord 7 th, suspended 4 th (b5) C7 7 th chord C M7 Minor 7 th, flatted 5 th (b5) Flatted 5 th Major 7 th C m7 7 th, flatted 5 th C mM7 Major 7th Minor 7 th Flatted 7 th Suspended 4 th chord Function Settings The [FUNCTION] button gives you access to a variety of operations related to adjusting or enhancing the sound and making settings for connection to external devices. Select the item and change the value There are 34 different items that can be set. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until desired item appears. Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed 34 function items are displayed in sequence. The description and display sample is provided on the Function Setting List on page 59–60. 100 StyleVol Value 2 Function item Set the value by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. For on/off settings or the PC Mode setting, use [+]/[-] buttons. ● Function Setting List Item Style Volume Display StyleVol Range/settings Description 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style. Song Volume SongVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song. Transpose TransPos -12–00–12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments. Tuning Tuning -100–000–100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments. Split Point SplitPnt 000–127 (C-2–G8) Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. Touch Sensitivity TouchSns 1 (Soft) 2 (Medium) 3 (Hard) When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of the feature. Style Register StyleReg 001–nnn Select and register a style file from flash files that are loaded from computer. Main Voice Volume M.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main Voice. Main Voice Octave M.Octave -2–0–2 Determines the octave range for the Main Voice. Main Voice Chorus Send Level M.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 59 Function Settings Item Range/settings Description D.Voice 001–482 Dual Voice Volume D.Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual Voice. Dual Voice Octave D.Octave -2–0–2 Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice. Dual Voice Chorus Send Level D.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Split Voice S.Voice 001–482 Selects the Split Voice. Determines the volume of the Split Voice. Split Voice Volume 60 Display Dual Voice Selects the Dual Voice. S.Volume 000–127 Split Voice Octave S.Octave -2–0–2 Determines the octave range for the Split Voice. Split Voice Chorus Send Level S.Chorus 000–127 Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). Refer to the Reverb Type list on page 81. Reverb Level RevLevel 000–127 Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Chorus Type Chorus 1–5 Determines the Chorus Type, including off (05). Refer to the Chorus Type list on page 81. Panel Sustain Sustain ON/OFF Determines whether or not Panel Sustain is always applied to the Main/Dual/Split Voices. Panel Sustain is applied continuously when ON, or not applied when OFF. Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 Determines the Harmony Type. Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 81. Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect when Harmony type 1–5 is selected. PC Mode PC0mode OFF/PC1/PC2 Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 63). Local On/Off Local ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). Initial Setup Send InitSend YES/NO Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Use the [+] button to transmit the data. Time Signature Numerator TimeSigN 00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome. Time Signature Denominator TimeSigD Half note, Quarter note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note Sets the length of each metronome beat. Metronome Volume MetroVol 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Lesson Track (R) R-Part 01–16 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Transferred Songs for Lessons” on page 68. Lesson Track (L) L-Part 01–16 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Transferred Songs for Lessons” on page 68 Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual About MIDI The instrument features a MIDI terminals that can be connected to other MIDI instruments and devices for expanded musical functionality. What is MIDI? MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a world-standard interface for communication between electronic musical instruments and music devices. When MIDI-equipped instruments are connected via a MIDI cable, it becomes possible to transfer performance and setting data between them for significantly enhanced performance and production potential. CAUTION • Connect the PSR-E313/YPT-310 to external equipment only after turning off power for all devices. Then, turn on the power, first to the PSR-E313/YPT-310, then to the connected external equipment. What You Can Do With MIDI • Transferring performance and setting data between the PSR-E313/YPT310 and MIDI-equipped instruments or computers. (page 62) • Transferring the data between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and computers. (page 65) PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 61 About MIDI Transferring Performance Data To and From Another Instrument By connecting the PSR-E313/YPT-310 to other MIDI devices or a computer, the performance data of the instrument can be used on those other MIDI devices or computer, and also the performance data from other MIDI devices and computer can be received and sounded with the PSR-E313/YPT-310. ● When the instrument is connected with another MIDI device, it transmits/receives performance data. PSR-E313/ YPT-310 MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI device MIDI IN MIDI OUT ● When the instrument is connected with a computer, it transmits/ receives performance data. MIDI IN MIDI OUT USB PSR-E313/ YPT-310 A USB-MIDI interface (such as the Yamaha UX16) ■ MIDI settings These settings should be made when transmitting/receiving performance data to a connected MIDI device or computer. Local Settings Local Control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal tone generator system; the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off. On ........ This is the normal setting in which notes played on the instrument’s keyboard are sounded by the internal tone generator system. Data received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal will also be played by the internal tone generator. Off ....... With this setting the instrument itself produces no sound (keyboard performance, Harmony, or Style playback), but the performance data is transmitted via the MIDI terminal. Data received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal will also be played by the internal tone generator. You can set the Local Control in the Function Settings (page 59). 62 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, Local Control may be the most likely cause. Playing the keyboard results in no sound when Local is set to OFF. About MIDI External Clock Settings These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON). On......... The instrument’s time based functions will be synchronized to the clock from an external device connected to the MIDI terminal. Off ........ The instrument uses its own internal clock (default). You can set the External Clock in the Function Settings (page 59). NOTE • If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from an external device, the Song, Style, and metronome functions will not start. PC Mode The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as shown below). The selections are PC1, PC2 and OFF. ● The chart of PC Settings PC1 PC2* OFF LOCAL Off Off On EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off SONG OUT** Off Off On STYLE OUT*** Off Off On KEYBOARD OUT**** Off On On * NOTE • Song Out, Style Out and Keyboard Out can only be changed by the PC setting. They cannot be set independently. • User Songs can be used with Song Out. Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook. Digital Music Notebook is a major new multimedia platform for music tuition and performance. Visit the website below for more information on the latest version of Digital Music Notebook and how to install it. www.digitalmusicnotebook.com ** Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during Song playback. *** Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during Style playback. **** Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). 1 Press and hold the [DEMO] button for longer than a second to call up the PC Mode. oFF 2 PC mode Hold for longer than a second. Select PC1, PC2, or OFF by using the [+], [-] buttons. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 63 About MIDI Remote Control of MIDI Devices You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on your computer (via the MIDI connection) —controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the panel. ● Remote control keys PSR-E313/YPT-310: To use the remote control functions, simultaneously hold down the lowest two keys on the keyboard (C1 and C#1) and press the appropriate key (shown below). C#1 C1 C6: Fast forward B5: Start A5: Stop G5: Rewind F5: Top (move to the beginning of the song) E5: Metronome ON/OFF PSR-E313/YPT-310 Panel Setting Transmission (Initial Send) Sends the PSR-E313/YPT-310 panel settings to an external MIDI device. When recording a PSR-E313/YPT-310 performance to an external sequencer or similar equipment, you can use this function to send the current PSR-E313/YPT-310 panel settings so that when the sequence is played back the original panel settings are automatically restored. You can set Initial Send in the Function settings (page 59). 64 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2 mode. About MIDI Transferring data between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and a computer The PSR-E313/YPT-310 includes 102 preset Songs and 106 Styles, but you can load other Songs and Styles from your computer and use them in the same way as the preset Songs and Styles as long as the loaded Song is SMF format 0* or the loaded Style is SFF (Style File Format). Loaded Song data will be stored to Song numbers beginning with 108 and one of the loaded style/s can be registered as the 107th style. In order to perform the operations described in this section you will need to use a computer connected to the Internet to download the free Musicsoft Downloader application. * The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. Most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. Installing Musicsoft Downloader You can download the “Musicsoft Downloader” application from the following website. Make sure that your computer has an Internet connection. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ ● The minimum computer requirements for Musicsoft Downloader operation are as follows: • OS : Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP Home Edition/ XP Professional • CPU : 233 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® processor family (500 MHz or more is recommended) • Memory : 64 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) • Hard Disk : at least 128 MB of free space (at least 512 MB of free space is recommended) • Display : 800 x 600 HighColor (16-bit) • Other : Microsoft® Internet Explorer®5.5 or higher NOTE • Visit the Yamaha website for more information on the latest version of Musicsoft Downloader (version 5.4.0 or higher) and how to install it. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 65 About MIDI Connecting a personal computer After installing the Musicsoft Downloader application on your computer, connect the PSR-E313/YPT-310 as described below. A Yamaha UX16 or similar USB-MIDI interface (sold separately) will be necessary for MIDI connection between the PSR-E313/YPT-310 and a USB-equipped computer. Make sure to purchase a Yamaha UX16 or a quality USB-MIDI interface at a musical instrument store, computer store or electrical appliance store. If you use the UX16 interface, install the driver supplied with the interface on your computer. MIDI IN MIDI OUT USB PSR-E313/ YPT-310 A USB-MIDI interface (such as the Yamaha UX16) 66 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual About MIDI Transferring a file from a computer You can transmit Song files and Style Files from your computer to the Flash Memory on your PSR-E313/YPT-310. For details about how to transmit Song file and Style File using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help topic “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” of the Musicsoft Downloader. NOTE • The Musicsoft Downloader application may not be able to access the instrument in the following cases: • During Style playback • During Song playback CAUTION • Use the power adaptor when transferring data. The data can be corrupted if the batteries fail during the transfer. • Never turn the power off and never plug/ unplug the AC power adaptor during data transmission. Not only will the data fail to be transferred and saved, but operation of the flash memory may become unstable and its contents may disappear completely when the power is turned on or off. NOTE • Close the window to exit from the Musicsoft Downloader and re-enable control of the instrument. Destination ● Data that can be loaded to the PSR-E313/YPT310 from a computer • Songs : 99 Songs max (Song numbers 108–) • Data : 373 kilobytes • Data Format : SMF Format 0 • File : 07PK3.BUP (Backup file) : ***.mid (MIDI Song) : ***.sty (Style File) PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 67 About MIDI Transferring a backup file from the PSR-E313/YPT-310 to a computer You can transfer backup data (page 31) to a computer as a “backup file” by using Musicsoft Downloader. For details about how to transmit backup files using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help topic “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” of the Musicsoft Downloader. NOTE • Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the PSR-E313/YPT-310. • Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so, it will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument. CAUTION • The backup data, including the five User Songs is transmitted/received as a single file. As a result, all backup data (including the five Songs) will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data. Click here to display the backup file at the bottom of the window. ● Data that can be transferred to a computer from the PSR-E313/YPT-310 • Backup file (07PK3.BUP: backup data containing five User Songs) • Songs transferred from a computer ● Erasing Transferred Song Data from the PSR-E313/YPT-310 Memory To erase all Songs transferred from the computer, use “flash clear” function on page 31. To erase specific Songs transferred from the computer, use the Delete function on Musicsoft Downloader. ● Using Transferred Songs for Lessons In order to use Songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for lessons it is necessary to specify which channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. Refer to the “Lesson Track (R)” or “Lesson Track (L)” in the Function Setting List on page 60. The procedure for setting the “guide track” is as follows: Select a transferred Song you want to use for lessons. Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “R-Part” or “L-Part” appears in the display, and then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. 68 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a Song or Style is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 62.) Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 57), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. • The volume is too soft. • The sound quality is poor. • The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play. • The recorded data of the Song, etc. does not play correctly. • The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new ones, or use the optional AC adaptor. The Style or Song does not play back when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to “External Clock Settings” on page 63. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 53) is set to an appropriate level. The Style does not sound properly. Is the Split Point set at an appropriate key for the cords you are playing? Set the Split Point at an appropriate key (page 46). Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/STOP] button is pressed after selecting Style number 098–106 (Pianist). This is not a malfunction. Style number 098–106 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if auto accompaniment is turned on. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or Song is playing back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or Song. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any style-related function. The harmony doesn’t sound. The method of sounding the harmony effect (01–26) differs depending on the selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony effect. For Types 06–26, turning the Auto Accompaniment on or off has no effect. However, it is necessary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06–12. The part indications, such as Right, Left and Both Hands, do not appear—even when pressing the [R] or [L] buttons for the Lesson. Make sure that you are not pressing the [R] or [L] buttons while the Song is playing. If you press one of the part buttons while playing the Song and before starting the Lesson, these buttons serve to mute the corresponding Song tracks. Stop the Song first, then select the desired part and start the Lesson. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 69 Voice List ■ Maximum Polyphony • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • NOTE The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Program Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take this into consideration. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. ● Panel Voice List Voice No. Bank Select MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Voice Name PIANO Bank Select MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Voice Name 031 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar 001 0 112 1 Grand Piano 032 0 117 28 60’s Clean Guitar 002 0 112 2 Bright Piano 033 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar 003 0 112 7 Harpsichord 034 0 112 28 Clean Guitar 004 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano 035 0 113 27 Octave Guitar 005 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano 036 0 112 29 Muted Guitar 006 0 113 3 CP 80 037 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar 038 0 112 31 E.PIANO Distortion Guitar 007 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 008 0 113 6 Hyper Tines 039 0 112 34 Finger Bass 009 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano 040 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass 010 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano 041 0 112 35 Pick Bass 011 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano 042 0 112 36 Fretless Bass 012 0 112 8 Clavi 043 0 112 37 Slap Bass 044 0 112 39 Synth Bass ORGAN BASS 013 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1 045 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass 014 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2 046 0 113 40 Dance Bass 015 0 112 19 Rock Organ 016 0 114 19 Purple Organ 047 0 112 49 String Ensemble 017 0 112 18 Click Organ 048 0 112 50 Chamber Strings 018 0 116 17 Bright Organ 049 0 113 50 Slow Strings 019 0 127 19 Theater Organ 050 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings 020 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ 051 0 112 51 Synth Strings 021 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ 052 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings 022 0 113 20 Chapel Organ 053 0 112 41 Violin 023 0 112 20 Church Organ 054 0 112 43 Cello 024 0 112 21 Reed Organ 055 0 112 44 Contrabass ACCORDION 056 0 112 47 Harp STRINGS 025 0 112 22 Musette Accordion 057 0 112 106 Banjo 026 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion 058 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit 027 0 113 24 Bandoneon 028 0 112 23 Harmonica 059 0 112 53 Choir 060 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble GUITAR 70 Voice No. CHOIR 029 0 112 25 Classical Guitar 061 0 112 55 Air Choir 030 0 112 26 Folk Guitar 062 0 112 54 Vox Humana PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Voice List Voice No. Bank Select MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Voice Name SAXOPHONE Voice No. Bank Select MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Voice Name 107 0 112 15 Tubular Bells 108 0 112 48 Timpani 063 0 112 67 Tenor Sax 064 0 112 66 Alto Sax 065 0 112 65 Soprano Sax 109 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1 066 0 112 68 Baritone Sax 110 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2 067 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 111 127 0 9 Room Kit 068 0 112 72 Clarinet 112 127 0 17 Rock Kit 069 0 112 69 Oboe 113 127 0 25 Electronic Kit 070 0 112 70 English Horn 114 127 0 26 Analog Kit 071 0 112 71 Bassoon 115 127 0 113 Dance Kit 116 127 0 33 Jazz Kit Brush Kit TRUMPET DRUM KITS 072 0 112 57 Trumpet 117 127 0 41 073 0 112 58 Trombone 118 127 0 49 Symphony Kit 074 0 113 58 Trombone Section 119 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1 075 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet 120 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2 076 0 112 61 French Horn 121 126 0 113 077 0 112 59 Tuba 078 0 112 62 Brass Section 079 0 113 62 Big Band Brass 080 0 113 63 80’s Brass 081 0 119 62 Mellow Horns 082 0 114 63 Techno Brass 083 0 112 63 Sound Effect Kit BRASS Synth Brass FLUTE 084 0 112 74 Flute 085 0 112 73 Piccolo 086 0 112 76 Pan Flute 087 0 112 75 Recorder 088 0 112 80 Ocarina SYNTH 089 0 112 81 Square Lead 090 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead 091 0 115 82 Analogon 092 0 119 82 Fargo 093 0 112 99 Star Dust 094 0 112 86 Voice Lead 095 0 112 101 Brightness 096 0 112 92 Xenon Pad 097 0 112 95 Equinox 098 0 112 89 Fantasia 099 0 113 90 Dark Moon 100 0 113 101 Bell Pad PERCUSSION 101 0 112 12 Vibraphone 102 0 112 13 Marimba 103 0 112 14 Xylophone 104 0 112 115 105 0 112 9 Celesta 106 0 112 11 Music Box Steel Drums PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 71 Voice List ● XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List Voice Name PIANO Voice Name 167 0 34 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 2 168 0 35 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 1 122 0 0 1 Grand Piano 169 0 37 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 3 123 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP 170 0 40 17 16+2'2/3 124 0 40 1 Piano Strings 171 0 64 17 Organ Bass 0 65 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 2 Cheezy Organ 125 0 41 1 Dream 172 126 0 0 2 Bright Piano 173 0 66 17 127 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP 174 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2 128 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano 175 0 0 18 Percussive Organ 129 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP 176 0 24 18 70’s Percussive Organ 130 0 32 3 Detuned CP80 177 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ Honky-tonk Piano 178 0 33 18 Light Organ 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2 131 0 0 4 132 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 179 133 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1 180 0 0 19 Rock Organ 134 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP 181 0 64 19 Rotary Organ 135 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1 182 0 65 19 Slow Rotary 136 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2 183 0 66 19 Fast Rotary 137 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP 184 0 0 20 Church Organ *138 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2 185 0 32 20 Church Organ 3 0 35 20 Church Organ 2 139 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano 186 140 0 0 7 Harpsichord 187 0 40 20 Notre Dame 141 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP 188 0 64 20 Organ Flute 142 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2 189 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute 143 0 0 8 Clavi 190 0 0 21 Reed Organ 144 0 1 8 Clavi KSP 191 0 40 21 Puff Organ 192 0 0 22 Accordion Harmonica CHROMATIC 145 0 0 9 Celesta 193 0 0 23 146 0 0 10 Glockenspiel 194 0 32 23 Harmonica 2 147 0 0 11 Music Box 195 0 0 24 Tango Accordion 148 0 64 11 Orgel 196 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2 149 0 0 12 Vibraphone 150 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP 197 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics GUITAR 151 0 0 13 Marimba 198 152 0 1 13 Marimba KSP 199 0 96 25 Ukulele 153 0 64 13 Sine Marimba 200 0 0 26 Steel Guitar 154 0 97 13 Balimba 201 0 35 26 12-string Guitar 155 0 98 13 Log Drums 202 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar 156 0 0 14 Xylophone 203 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound Tubular Bells 204 0 96 26 Mandolin 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar 157 0 0 15 158 0 96 15 Church Bells 205 159 0 97 15 Carillon 206 0 32 27 Jazz Amp 160 0 0 16 Dulcimer 207 0 0 28 Clean Guitar 161 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2 208 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar 162 0 96 16 Cimbalom 209 0 0 29 Muted Guitar 163 0 97 16 Santur 210 0 40 29 Funk Guitar 211 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar ORGAN 72 MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Bank Select Voice No. MIDI Program Voice MSB LSB Change# No. (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Bank Select 164 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ 212 0 45 29 Jazz Man 165 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ 213 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar 166 0 33 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 1 214 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Voice List MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Bank Select Voice No. MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Bank Select Voice Name Voice No. Voice Name 215 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar 216 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar 261 0 0 49 Strings 1 217 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2 262 0 3 49 Stereo Strings 218 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics 263 0 8 49 Slow Strings 219 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback 264 0 35 49 60’s Strings 220 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2 265 0 40 49 Orchestra 266 0 41 49 Orchestra 2 Tremolo Orchestra BASS ENSEMBLE 221 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass 267 0 42 49 222 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm 268 0 45 49 Velocity Strings 223 0 45 33 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 269 0 0 50 Strings 2 224 0 0 34 Finger Bass 270 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings 225 0 18 34 Finger Dark 271 0 8 50 Legato Strings 226 0 40 34 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 272 0 40 50 Warm Strings 227 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass 273 0 41 50 Kingdom 228 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2 274 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1 229 0 65 34 Modulated Bass 275 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2 230 0 0 35 Pick Bass 276 0 0 53 Choir Aahs 231 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass 277 0 3 53 Stereo Choir 232 0 0 36 Fretless Bass 278 0 32 53 Mellow Choir 233 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2 279 0 40 53 Choir Strings 234 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3 280 0 0 54 Voice Oohs 235 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4 281 0 0 55 Synth Voice 236 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1 282 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2 237 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass 283 0 41 55 Choral 238 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2 284 0 64 55 Analog Voice 239 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap 285 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit 240 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1 286 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2 241 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass 287 0 64 56 Impact 242 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2 243 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass 288 0 0 57 244 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass 289 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet 245 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass 290 0 0 58 Trombone BRASS Trumpet 246 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark 291 0 18 58 Trombone 2 *247 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass 292 0 0 59 Tuba 248 0 41 40 DX Bass 293 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet 294 0 0 61 French Horn STRINGS 249 0 0 41 Violin 295 0 6 61 French Horn Solo 250 0 8 41 Slow Violin 296 0 32 61 French Horn 2 251 0 0 42 Viola 297 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra 252 0 0 43 Cello 298 0 0 62 Brass Section 253 0 0 44 Contrabass 299 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section 254 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings 300 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1 255 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings 301 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass 256 0 40 45 Suspense Strings 302 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2 257 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings 303 0 18 64 Soft Brass 258 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp 304 0 41 64 259 0 40 47 Yang Chin 260 0 0 48 Timpani Choir Brass REED 305 0 0 65 Soprano Sax PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 73 Voice List MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Bank Select Voice No. Voice No. Voice Name 306 0 0 66 Alto Sax 352 0 0 90 Warm Pad 307 0 40 66 Sax Section 353 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad 308 0 0 67 Tenor Sax 354 0 0 92 Choir Pad 309 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 355 0 66 92 Itopia 310 0 0 68 Baritone Sax 356 0 0 93 Bowed Pad 311 0 0 69 Oboe 357 0 0 94 Metallic Pad 312 0 0 70 English Horn 358 0 0 95 Halo Pad 313 0 0 71 Bassoon 359 0 0 96 Sweep Pad 314 0 0 72 Clarinet 360 0 0 97 Rain 315 0 0 73 Piccolo 361 0 65 97 African Wind 316 0 0 74 Flute 362 0 66 97 Carib 317 0 0 75 Recorder 363 0 0 98 Sound Track 318 0 0 76 Pan Flute 364 0 27 98 Prologue 319 0 0 77 Blown Bottle 365 0 0 99 Crystal 320 0 0 78 Shakuhachi 366 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp 321 0 0 79 Whistle 367 0 14 99 Popcorn 322 0 0 80 Ocarina 368 0 18 99 Tiny Bells 369 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel PIPE SYNTH LEAD 74 MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Bank Select Voice Name SYNTH EFFECTS 323 0 0 81 Square Lead 370 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes 324 0 6 81 Square Lead 2 371 0 41 99 Clear Bells 325 0 8 81 LM Square 372 0 42 99 Chorus Bells 326 0 18 81 Hollow 373 0 65 99 Soft Crystal 327 0 19 81 Shroud 374 0 70 99 Air Bells 328 0 64 81 Mellow 375 0 71 99 Bell Harp 329 0 65 81 Solo Sine 376 0 72 99 Gamelimba 330 0 66 81 Sine Lead 377 0 0 100 Atmosphere 331 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead 378 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere 332 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2 379 0 19 100 Hollow Release 333 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth 380 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano 334 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth 381 0 64 100 Nylon Harp 335 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth 382 0 65 100 Harp Vox 336 0 20 82 Big Lead 383 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad 337 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog 384 0 0 101 Brightness 338 0 0 83 Calliope Lead 385 0 0 102 Goblins 339 0 65 83 Pure Lead 386 0 64 102 Goblins Synth 340 0 0 84 Chiff Lead 387 0 65 102 Creeper 341 0 0 85 Charang Lead 388 0 67 102 Ritual 342 0 64 85 Distorted Lead 389 0 68 102 To Heaven 343 0 0 86 Voice Lead 390 0 70 102 Night 344 0 0 87 Fifths Lead 391 0 71 102 Glisten 345 0 35 87 Big Five 392 0 96 102 Bell Choir 346 0 0 88 Bass & Lead 393 0 0 103 Echoes 347 0 16 88 Big & Low 394 0 0 104 Sci-Fi 348 0 64 88 Fat & Perky 349 0 65 88 Soft Whirl WORLD 395 0 0 105 Sitar SYNTH PAD 396 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar 350 0 0 89 New Age Pad 397 0 35 105 Sitar 2 351 0 64 89 Fantasy 398 0 97 105 Tamboura PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Voice List MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Bank Select Voice No. MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Bank Select Voice Name Voice No. Voice Name 399 0 0 106 Banjo 446 64 0 33 Shower 400 0 28 106 Muted Banjo 447 64 0 34 Thunder 401 0 96 106 Rabab 448 64 0 35 Wind 402 0 97 106 Gopichant 449 64 0 36 Stream 403 0 98 106 Oud 450 64 0 37 Bubble 404 0 0 107 Shamisen 451 64 0 38 Feed 405 0 0 108 Koto 452 64 0 49 Dog 406 0 96 108 Taisho-kin 453 64 0 50 Horse 407 0 97 108 Kanoon 454 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2 408 0 0 109 Kalimba 455 64 0 56 Maou 409 0 0 110 Bagpipe 456 64 0 65 Phone Call 410 0 0 111 Fiddle 457 64 0 66 Door Squeak 411 0 0 112 Shanai 458 64 0 67 Door Slam PERCUSSIVE 459 64 0 68 Scratch Cut 412 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell 460 64 0 69 Scratch Split 413 0 96 113 Bonang 461 64 0 70 Wind Chime 414 0 97 113 Altair 462 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2 415 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs 463 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition 416 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 464 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal 417 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal 465 64 0 83 Car Passing 418 0 0 114 Agogo 466 64 0 84 Car Crash 419 0 0 115 Steel Drums 467 64 0 85 Siren 420 0 97 115 Glass Percussion 468 64 0 86 Train 421 0 98 115 Thai Bells 469 64 0 87 Jet Plane 422 0 0 116 Woodblock 470 64 0 88 Starship 423 0 96 116 Castanets 471 64 0 89 Burst 424 0 0 117 Taiko Drum 472 64 0 90 Roller Coaster 425 0 96 117 Gran Cassa 473 64 0 91 Submarine 426 0 0 118 Melodic Tom 474 64 0 97 Laugh 427 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2 475 64 0 98 Scream 428 0 65 118 Real Tom 476 64 0 99 Punch 429 0 66 118 Rock Tom 477 64 0 100 Heartbeat 430 0 0 119 Synth Drum 478 64 0 101 Footsteps 431 0 64 119 Analog Tom 479 64 0 113 Machine Gun 432 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion 480 64 0 114 Laser Gun 433 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal 481 64 0 115 Explosion 482 64 0 116 Firework SOUND EFFECTS 434 0 0 121 Fret Noise 435 0 0 122 Breath Noise 436 0 0 123 Seashore 437 0 0 124 Bird Tweet 438 0 0 125 Telephone Ring 439 0 0 126 Helicopter 440 0 0 127 Applause 441 0 0 128 Gunshot 442 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 443 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2 444 64 0 4 String Slap 445 64 0 17 Flute Key Click The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 75 Drum Kit List • “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “109: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.) C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 76 A#5 Voice No. MSB(0–127) / LSB(0–127) / PC(1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Off Group Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 3 26 D 0 14 D -1 3 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 4 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 4 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 O 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 O 41 F 1 29 F 0 O 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 O 84 C 5 72 C 4 O 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 O 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 2 93 A 5 81 A 4 2 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 109 127/0/1 110 127/0/2 111 127/0/9 112 127/0/17 113 127/0/25 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Snare H Soft 2 SD Rock H Hi Q 2 Snare L Bass Drum H Open Rim Shot 2 Bass Drum 2 Bass Drum H BD Rock BD Rock BD Gate Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock L SD Rock L Snare H Hard 2 SD Room H Room Tom 1 SD Rock Rim Rock Tom 1 SD Rock H E Tom 1 Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Room Tom 4 Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 4 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 4 E Tom 5 Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 Scratch Push Scratch Pull Drum Kit List C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 Voice No. MSB(0–127) / LSB(0–127) / PC(1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Off Group Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 3 26 D 0 14 D -1 3 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 4 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 4 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 O 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 O 41 F 1 29 F 0 O 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 O 84 C 5 72 C 4 O 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 O 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 2 93 A 5 81 A 4 2 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 109 127/0/1 114 127/0/26 115 127/0/28 116 127/0/33 117 127/0/41 Standard Kit 1 Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 SD Rock H Hi Q 2 AnSD Snappy SD Jazz H Light Bass Drum H BD Analog L BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 AnBD Dance-1 AnSD OpenRim AnBD Dance-2 AnBD Dance-3 Analog Side Stick AnSD Q BD Jazz BD Jazz SD Jazz L Brush Slap Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 AnSD Ana+Acoustic Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 3 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 4 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open 2 Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 SD Jazz M Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tap Brush Tom 1 Analog Cowbell Analog Cowbell Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Maracas Analog Maracas Analog Claves Analog Claves Scratch Push Scratch Pull Scratch Push Scratch Pull Brush Slap L Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 4 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 77 Drum Kit List C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 78 A#5 Voice No. MSB(0–127) / LSB(0–127) / PC(1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Off Group Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 3 26 D 0 14 D -1 3 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 4 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 4 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 O 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 O 41 F 1 29 F 0 O 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 O 84 C 5 72 C 4 O 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 O 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 2 93 A 5 81 A 4 2 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 109 127/0/1 118 127/0/49 119 126/0/1 120 126/0/2 121 126/0/113 Standard Kit 1 Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Sound Effect Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Drum Loop Bass Drum L Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Cutting Noise 2 Marching Sn M String Slap Marching Sn H Jazz Tom 1 Phone Call Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Jazz Tom 2 Jazz Tom 3 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Hand Cym. L Jazz Tom 6 Hand Cym.Short L Flute Key Click Hand Cym. H Hand Cym.Short H Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Heartbeat Footsteps Door Squeak Door Slam Applause Camera Horn Hiccup Cuckoo Clock Stream Frog Rooster Dog Cat Owl Horse Gallop Horse Neigh Cow Lion Scratch Yo! Go! Get up! Whoow! Huuaah! Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Uh!+Hit Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Maou Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Style List Style No. Style Name Style No. 8 Beat Style Name Style No. Swing & Jazz Style Name Traditional 001 8BeatModern 040 BigBandFast 078 USMarch 002 60’sGtrPop 041 BigBandBallad 079 6/8March 003 8BeatAdria 042 JazzClub 080 GermanMarch 004 60’s8Beat 043 Swing1 081 PolkaPop 005 8Beat 044 Swing2 082 OberPolka 006 OffBeat 045 Five/Four 083 Tarantella 007 60’sRock 046 Dixieland 084 Showtune 008 HardRock 047 Ragtime 085 ChristmasSwing 009 RockShuffle 086 ChristmasWaltz 010 8BeatRock 087 ScottishReel 16 Beat R&B 048 Soul 049 DetroitPop Waltz 011 16Beat 050 6/8Soul 088 SwingWaltz 012 PopShuffle 051 CrocoTwist 089 JazzWaltz 013 GuitarPop 052 Rock&Roll 090 CountryWaltz 014 16BtUptempo 053 ComboBoogie 091 OberWalzer 015 KoolShuffle 054 6/8Blues 092 Musette 016 HipHopLight Country Children Ballad 055 CountryPop 093 Learning2/4 017 PianoBallad 056 CountrySwing 094 Learning4/4 018 LoveSong 057 Country2/4 095 Learning6/8 019 6/8ModernEP 058 Bluegrass 096 Fun 3/4 020 6/8SlowRock 097 Fun 4/4 021 OrganBallad 059 BrazilianSamba 022 PopBallad 060 BossaNova 098 Stride 023 16BeatBallad Latin Pianist 061 Tijuana 099 PianoSwing Dance 062 DiscoLatin 100 PianoBoogie 024 EuroTrance 063 Mambo 101 Arpeggio 025 Ibiza 064 Salsa 102 Habanera 026 SwingHouse 065 Beguine 103 SlowRock 027 Clubdance 066 Reggae 104 8BeatPianoBallad 028 ClubLatin 105 6/8PianoMarch 029 Garage1 067 VienneseWaltz 106 PianoWaltz 030 Garage2 068 EnglishWaltz 031 TechnoParty 069 Slowfox 032 UKPop 070 Foxtrot 033 HipHopGroove 071 Quickstep 034 HipShuffle 072 Tango 035 HipHopPop 073 Pasodoble Disco 074 Samba 036 70’sDisco 075 ChaChaCha 037 LatinDisco 076 Rumba 038 SaturdayNight 077 Jive 039 DiscoHands Ballroom PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 79 Music Database List MDB No. MDB Name MDB No. POP R&B MDB No. MDB Name 77 MuchoTrp 1 AlvFever 39 AmazingG 78 Sunshine 2 DayPdise 40 BoogiePf 79 Tico Org 3 GoMyWay 41 Clock Rk 80 TrbWave 4 HowDeep! 42 CU later 5 HurryLuv 43 HappyDay 81 BoxerFlt 6 Imagine 44 RisingSn 82 CntryRds 7 JustCall 45 ShookUp 83 Jambala 8 SultanSw 46 TeddyBer 84 TopWorld 9 WhitePle SWING & JAZZ 85 YlwRose 10 YesterPf ROCK COUNTRY 47 ChooChoo 48 HighMoon 86 BrazilBr BALLROOM 11 JumpRock 49 InMood 87 CherryTp 12 PickUpPc 50 MistySax 88 DanubeWv 13 RdRiverR 51 MoonLit 89 TangoAc 14 SatsfyGt 52 New York 90 Tea4Two 15 Sheriff 53 SaintMch 16 SmokeWtr 54 ShearJz 91 CampRace 17 TwistAgn 55 TstHoney 92 CielPari 18 VenusPop 56 USPatrol 93 GrndClok EASY LISTENING 94 JinglBel DANCE TRADITIONAL 19 2 of Us 57 Close2U 95 MickMrch 20 B Leave 58 Entrtain 96 Showbiz 21 Back St 59 LuvStory 97 StarMrch 22 Crockett 60 MyPrince 98 WashPost 23 FunkyTwn 61 PupetStr 99 XmasWalz 24 KillSoft 62 Raindrop 100 YankDood 25 Nine PM 63 R'ticGtr 26 SingBack 64 SingRain 27 StrandD 65 SmallWld 66 SpkSoft BALLAD 80 MDB Name 28 AdelineB 67 StrangeN 29 CatMemry 68 TimeGoes 30 ElvGhett 69 WhteXmas 31 Feeling 70 WishStar 32 Mn Rivr 71 WondrWld 33 OnMyMnd 34 OverRbow 72 BambaLa 35 ReleseMe 73 BeHappy! 36 SavingLv 74 CopaLola 37 SmokyEye 75 DayNight 38 WhisprSx 76 Ipanema PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual LATIN Effect Type List ● Harmony Types No. 01 02 03 04 05 Harmony Type Duet Trio Block Country Octave 06 Trill 1/4 note 07 Trill 1/6 note 08 Trill 1/8 note 09 Trill 1/12 note 10 Trill 1/16 note 11 Trill 1/24 note 12 Trill 1/32 note 13 Tremolo 1/4 note 14 Tremolo 1/6 note 15 Tremolo 1/8 note 16 Tremolo 1/12 note 17 Tremolo 1/16 note 18 Tremolo 1/24 note 19 Tremolo 1/32 note 20 Echo 1/4 note 21 Echo 1/6 note 22 Echo 1/8 note 23 Echo 1/12 note 24 Echo 1/16 note 25 Echo 1/24 note 26 Echo 1/32 note Description If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the Split Point while playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompaniment on. One, two or three notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you play. When playing back a Song that includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever keys are played. 3 3 If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) continuously. 3 3 3 If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously. (The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.) 3 3 3 If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played. (The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.) 3 ● Reverb Types No. Reverb Type Description 01–03 Hall 1–3 04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb. 06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments. 08–09 10 Concert hall reverb. Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb. Off No effect. ● Chorus Types No. 1–2 3–4 5 Chorus Type Chorus 1–2 Description Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. Flanger 1–2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound. Off No effect. PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 81 82 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Change Control 0,32 1 6 38 7,10 11 64 71,73,74 Key's Ch's After Touch Pitch Bend Note ON Note OFF Velocity o x x x o x o x x x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 0 - 127 : True voice ************** 3 x ************** Default Messages Altered Mode Note Number 1 - 16 x Default Changed Transmitted o o o x o o o o o x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x 0 - 127 0 - 127 3 x x 1 - 16 x Recognized [ Portable Keyboard ] MIDI Implementation Chart Basic Channel Function... YAMAHA Model PSR-E313/YPT-310 Expression Sustain Bank Select Modulation wheel Data Entry(MSB) Data Entry(LSB) Remarks Date:21-Aug-2006 Version:1.0 MIDI Implementation Chart : True # x x x x o x Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY *1 Refer to #2 on page 84. Aux :All Sound OFF :Reset All Cntrls :Local ON/OFF Mes- :All Notes OFF sages:Active Sense :Reset x x x o o o : Song Pos. : Song Sel. : Tune *1 o(120,126,127) o(121) o(122) o(123-125) o x o o x x x o o 0 - 127 o o o o o Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO o 0 - 127 ************** o x o x x System : Clock Real Time: Commands Common System Exclusive Prog Change 72 84 91,93 96,97 100,101 o : Yes x : No Release Time Portamento Cntrl Effect 1,3 Depth RPN Inc,Dec RPN LSB,MSB MIDI Implementation Chart PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 83 MIDI Data Format NOTE: 1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel voices, auto accompaniment, and songs. • MIDI Master Tuning • System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type and Chorus Type. 2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be transmitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be transmitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the Harmony effect. 3 Exclusive <GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H • This message automatically restores all default settings for the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning. <MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H • This message allows the volume of all channels to be changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive). • The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values for “ll” are ignored.) <MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H • This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of all channels. • The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning. • The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respectively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc.” <Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Reverb Type MSB • ll : Reverb Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 84) for details. <Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Chorus Type MSB • ll : Chorus Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 84) for details. 4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is transmitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH (accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are recognized. 5 Local ON/OFF <Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F <Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00 Value for “n” is ignored. ■ Effect map • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • * When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type (coming the closest to the specified value) is automatically set. * The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond to the number indicated in the display. ● REVERB TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 0 1 2 8 16 17 0 No Effect 1 (01)Hall1 2 Room 3 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2 4 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2 5...127 (02)Hall2 18 19 20 (03)Hall3 (04)Room1 (05)Room2 No Effect ● CHORUS TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 0...63 1 2 8 16 17 No Effect 64 Thru 65 Chorus 66 Celeste 67 Flanger 68...127 84 0 (2)Chorus2 No Effect PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual (1)Chorus1 (3)Flanger1 (4)Flanger2 18 19 20 Specifications Keyboards • 61 standard-size keys (C1–C6), with Touch Response Display • LCD display (backlit) Setup • STANDBY/ON • MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX Panel Controls • [L]/[REC TRACK 2], [R]/[REC TRACK 1], [LISTEN & LEARN], [TIMING], [WAITING], [A-B REPEAT]/[ACMP ON/OFF], [REW]/[INTRO/ENDING/rit.], [FF]/[[MAIN/AUTO FILL], [TEMPO/TAP], [REC], [PAUSE]/[SYNC START], [START/STOP], [SONG], [STYLE], [VOICE], [FUNCTION], [PORTABLE GRAND], [MUSIC DATABASE], [REVERB ON/OFF], [DEMO], [METRONOME ON/OFF], [SPLIT ON/OFF], [DUAL ON/OFF], [HARMONY ON/OFF], [TOUCH ON/OFF], number buttons [0]–[9], [+/ YES], [-/ NO] Voice • 108 panel voices + 12 drum kits + 1 sound effect kit + 359 XGlite voices + 2 XGlite optional voices • Polyphony: 32 • DUAL • SPLIT Style • 106 preset Styles + flash memory • Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL • Fingering: Multi fingering • Style Volume • Style Register Education Feature • Chord Dictionary • Lesson 1–3 Function • Style Volume, Song Volume, Transpose, Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Register, Main voice (Volume, Octave, Chorus Send Level), Dual voice (Voice, Volume, Octave, Chorus Send Level), Split voice (Voice, Volume, Octave, Chorus Send Level), Reverb Type, Reverb level, Chorus Type, Panel Sustain, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume, PC mode (PC1/PC2/Off), Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Setup Send, Time Signature (Numerator, Denominator), Metronome Volume, Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L), Demo Cancel MIDI • Local On/Off • Initial Setup Send • External Clock • PC mode Auxiliary jacks • PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, MIDI IN/OUT, SUSTAIN Amplifier • 2.5W + 2.5W Speakers • 12cm x 2 Power Consumption • 10W (When using PA-130 power adaptor) Power Supply • Adaptor: Yamaha PA-130 or an equivalent • Batteries: Six “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries Dimensions (W x D x H) • 945 x 370 x 128 mm (37-1/4" x 14-5/8" x 5-1/16") Weight • 4.9kg (10 lbs. 13 oz.) (not including batteries) Supplied Accessories • Music Rest • Owner’s Manual Optional Accessories • AC Power Adaptor: Yamaha PA-130 or an equivalent • USB-MIDI Interface: UX16 • Footswitch: FC4/FC5 • Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L • Headphones: HPE-150/HPE-30 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Effects • Reverb: 9 types • Chorus: 4 types • Harmony: 26 types Song • 102 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Flash Memory • Song Clear • Song Volume Music Database • 100 Recording • Song User Song: 5 Songs Recording Tracks: 1, 2 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 85 Index Panel Controls and Terminals Alphabetical Order A-B REPEAT button ................................................. 41 ACMP ON/OFF button .............................................. 21 DEMO button ............................................................. 19 DUAL ON/OFF button .............................................. 13 FF button .................................................................... 19 FUNCTION button .............................................. 33, 59 HARMONY ON/OFF button .................................... 42 INTRO/ENDING/rit. Button ..................................... 51 L button ...................................................................... 36 LISTEN & LEARN button ........................................ 36 MAIN/AUTO FILL button ........................................ 51 MASTER VOLUME control ................................. 9, 32 METRONOME ON/OFF button ............................... 24 number buttons 0–9, +/YES, -/NO ............................ 33 PAUSE button ............................................................ 19 PORTABLE GRAND button .................................... 15 R button ...................................................................... 36 REC button ................................................................. 27 REC TRACK 1 button ............................................... 29 REC TRACK 2 button ............................................... 29 REVERB ON/OFF button ......................................... 43 REW button ............................................................... 19 SONG button ....................................................... 18, 33 SPLIT ON/OFF button .............................................. 14 STANDBY/ON switch .......................................... 9, 32 START/STOP button ................................................. 32 STYLE button ...................................................... 20, 33 SYNC START button ................................................ 21 TEMPO/TAP button .................................................. 48 TIMING button .......................................................... 37 TOUCH ON/OFF button ........................................... 45 VOICE button ...................................................... 12, 33 WAITING button ....................................................... 38 A DC IN 12V jack ........................................................... 8 MIDI IN/OUT terminal .............................................. 61 PHONES/OUTPUT jack .............................................. 9 SUSTAIN jack ............................................................. 9 E AB Repeat .................................................................. 41 AC Power Adaptor ....................................................... 8 ACMP ON/OFF ......................................................... 21 Auto Accompaniment ................................................ 21 Auto accompaniment range .................................. 21–22 B Backup ........................................................................ 31 Backup Clear .............................................................. 31 Backup File ................................................................ 31 Battery .......................................................................... 8 Beat Display ............................................................... 34 C Cancel ......................................................................... 30 Chord ........................................................ 22, 55–56, 58 Chord Dictionary ........................................................ 57 Chord Display ...................................................... 34, 56 Chorus ........................................................................ 44 Chorus Send Level (Dual) .......................................... 60 Chorus Send Level (Main) ......................................... 59 Chorus Send Level (Split) .......................................... 60 Chorus Type List ........................................................ 81 Computer .............................................................. 62–68 D Delete (Song) ............................................................. 30 Demo .......................................................................... 19 Display ....................................................................... 34 Drum Kit .................................................................... 15 Drum Kit List ............................................................. 76 Dual ............................................................................ 13 Ending .................................................................. 50, 52 External Clock ...................................................... 60, 63 F FF ............................................................................... 19 Flash Clear ................................................................. 31 Flash Memory ............................................................ 67 Footswitch (Sustain jack) ............................................. 9 Function Setting List ............................................ 59–60 G Grade .......................................................................... 37 H Harmony ............................................................... 42–43 Harmony Type List .................................................... 81 Harmony Volume ....................................................... 60 86 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual Index I S Initial Send ................................................................. 60 Initialization ............................................................... 31 Intro ...................................................................... 49, 52 Save data to computer ................................................ 68 SMF Format 0 ............................................................ 65 Song ............................................................................ 18 Song List .................................................................... 19 Song Volume .............................................................. 39 Split ............................................................................ 14 Split Point ............................................................. 14, 46 Start ............................................................................ 32 Stop ............................................................................ 32 Style .......................................................... 20–21, 49–52 Style File .............................................................. 54, 67 Style List .................................................................... 79 Style Volume .............................................................. 53 Supplied Accessories ............................................. 6, 85 Synchro Start ........................................................ 21, 49 K Keyboard Display ...................................................... 34 L Lesson .................................................................. 35–38 Lesson track R/L for transferred songs ................ 60, 68 Local .................................................................... 60, 62 M Main/Auto fill ...................................................... 51–52 Master Volume Control ......................................... 9, 32 Measure ...................................................................... 34 Melody Voice ............................................................. 39 Metronome ........................................................... 24–26 Metronome Volume ................................................... 26 MIDI .......................................................................... 61 Music Database .......................................................... 23 Music Rest ................................................................... 6 Musicsoft Downloader ............................................... 65 Mute ........................................................................... 40 N NO .............................................................................. 30 Notation ...................................................................... 34 O Octave (Dual) ............................................................. 60 Octave (Main) ............................................................ 59 Octave (Split) ............................................................. 60 One Touch Setting ..................................................... 47 Option ........................................................................ 85 P Panel Sustain .............................................................. 44 Part ............................................................................. 36 Pause .......................................................................... 19 PC setting ................................................................... 63 Press and Hold for a while ......................................... 32 T Tempo ........................................................................ 48 Time Signature ........................................................... 25 Touch Response ......................................................... 45 Touch sensitivity ........................................................ 45 Track .............................................................. 28, 34, 40 Track Rec ............................................................. 28–29 Transfer ................................................................ 62, 68 Transpose ................................................................... 46 Tuning ........................................................................ 47 Turn Auto accompaniment on or off .......................... 21 U User Song ............................................................. 27–28 V Voice .................................................................... 12–14 Voice List ................................................................... 70 X XGlite ........................................................................... 6 Y YES ............................................................................ 30 R Recording ............................................................. 27–29 Remote Control .......................................................... 64 Reverb ........................................................................ 43 Reverb Level .............................................................. 60 Reverb Type List ........................................................ 81 Rew ............................................................................ 19 Rhythm ....................................................................... 20 Root ...................................................................... 55, 57 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual 87 Limited Warranty 90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models included in the following series of products: PSR, YPT SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor. If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements. THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state. CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities: 1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below. 2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under warranty. 3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely. *Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days. IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed. 4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and to follow all safety precautions. EXCLUSIONS This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of: 1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity. 2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha. 3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country. Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below. Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________ Purchased from____________________________________________________________ Date______________________________________ (Retailer) YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park, CA 90620 KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL! 88 PSR-E313/YPT-310 Owner’s Manual For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN EUROPE Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria, CEE Department Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3467-3300 MALAYSIA PHILIPPINES DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 NORWAY THE UNITED KINGDOM ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 [PK] 38 Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page (English Only) http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2007 Yamaha Corporation WH70550 XXXPOTYX.X-01A0 Printed in China